Home

Quantum Scalar i40

1. 0000e ee aes 126 Configuring Media Security 0000 0 ee eee 127 Viewing Saving and E mailing Media Security Log 128 Viewing the Media Usage Log 000 cece eee eee 129 Automatically E mailing Advanced Reporting Reports and Logs 130 Creating a Recipient 0 0000 e ec eee 131 Modifying a Recipient 0000 cece ee 134 Deleting a Recipient 0000 eee eee 134 Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations 135 Logging Mrana nananana aaa abet eeels pede bebe 136 Simultaneous Logins 00 00 cee ee 136 Logging in for the First Time 0 00000 eee 136 Logging in Using the Operator Panel 137 Logging in Via the Web Client 000005 137 Logging in When LDAP or Kerberos is Enabled 138 Logging Out eee 138 Shutting Down Restarting Turning Off and Removing Power 139 Shutting Down the Library 00 00 eeeeeeee 140 Restarting the Library 0 20 0000 eee 142 Turning Off the Library 1 2 2 0 0 c eee eee 143 Completely Removing Library Power 045 144 Emergency Power off Procedure 020000 eee 144 Taking the Library Offline 00000 eee 145 Unlocking and Opening the IE Station 00055 145 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide vii Contents Releasing Magazines 000 c eee eee 148 Releasing Magazines via the User In
2. In addition to the standard features the following additional licensable features are available e Capacity on Demand COD e Advanced Reporting includes custom reports and logs and Control Path Failover functionality e Encryption Key Management For information on how to obtain and install a license key see Adding or Upgrading Licensable Features on page 68 All Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 library configurations ship with the purchased number of slots pre activated After the initial purchase of your library you can activate any remaining inactive slots in your library by purchasing a COD license upgrade e The Scalar i40 base configuration has 25 slots activated these slots comprise the first 5 magazine columns starting from the left front magazine column going clockwise You can buy a COD license to activate the remaining 15 slots e The Scalar i80 base configuration has 50 slots activated these slots comprise the first 5 magazine columns starting from the left front magazine column going clockwise You can buy a COD license to activate the remaining 30 slots To see your library s current configuration and slot availability open the Library Configuration Report choose Reports gt Library Configuration from the Web client Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Advanced Reporting Chapter 1 Description Licensable Features The Advanced Reporting license applies to your entire library regard
3. 164 If no licensed slots are available you must purchase additional slots or modify or delete a partition to free existing slots For information on how to modify partitions see Modifying Partitions on page 55 For information on how to delete partitions see Deleting Partitions on page 55 Cleaning slots are not assigned to specific partitions They are shared by all partitions within a library You do not need to configure cleaning slots if you clean tape drives manually For more information about manual tape drive cleaning see Manually Cleaning Tape Drives on page 170 You do not need to configure cleaning slots if you use host based cleaning Cleaning slots are not visible to the host application To use host based cleaning configure zero cleaning slots in the library and set up your host application to manage the cleaning process See your host application documentation for more information Use universal cleaning cartridges to clean tape drives If you attempt to clean a tape drive using a non cleaning cartridge the library may show that the operation completed but the tape drive will not be cleaned and the library will issue a diagnostic ticket The preferred method of labeling a cleaning cartridge is to have CLN or CLNU as the prefix on the label Any cartridge detected with a CLN or CLNU prefix will be considered a universal cleaning cartridge regardless of any media identification extension Cartridges contain
4. E mailing the Configuration Record Chapter 8 Getting Information About the Library Saving and E mailing the Library Configuration Record e Serial Attached SCSI SAS tape drives partition name number of tape drives in partition drive location SCSI element address interface type drive type ready state online status barcode media type element address vendor model physical serial number logical serial number SAS Address firmware level control path status e Partition information e Library information Number of partitions number of cleaning slots number of unassigned slots number of import export I E slots I E manual assignment setting e Partition details Partition name number of slots number of tape drives and number of cartridges Administrators can use the Tools Save Configuration Record screen on the Web client to e mail the library configuration record You can only save the library configuration record from the Web client Web Client 1 Select Tools gt Save Configuration Record 2 Save the file to a known location on your computer Administrators can use the Tools E mail Configuration Record screen on the Web client to e mail the library configuration record Note Do not enter more than one e mail address in the E mail Address text box on the Tools E mail Configuration Record screen If you need to send the configuration record to multiple e mail addresses repeat the
5. Chapter 5 Advanced Reporting Using Advanced Reporting Reports In some circumstances you may wish to delete the information contained in the log files used to build the advanced reports To do this click the Delete button in the Report Data section of either report configuration page see Figure 20 on page 125 This action deletes the data for both the Drive Resource Utilization report and the Media Integrity Analysis report Caution Once you delete the data in the log files you cannot get it back The Reload button does NOT retrieve deleted data It is recommended that you save all the data for both the Drive Resource Utilization report and the Media Integrity Analysis report before deleting the data see Saving and E mailing Advanced Reporting Data Files on page 125 Report Data 651 records read You cannot save the report as it appears on the screen but you can save or e mail the report data as a comma separated values csv file You can then import the csv data into a spreadsheet program and manipulate it to create your own reports for analysis The csv file contains all of the data in the log file that falls within the date range you specify You can only access this report from the Web client Web Client 1 Generate a report 2 Scroll down to the bottom of the report viewing screen to a box titled Retrieve the Report Data File See Figure 21 on page 126 3 To save the report data as a csv
6. You can manually force a control path failover You might want to force a failover to check that the control path on the non active tape drive is operational or to switch back to the original control path tape drive once the issue that originally caused the failover has been fixed 1 Click Tools gt Drive Operations The Tools Drive Operations screen displays Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 115 Chapter 5 Advanced Reporting Working with Control Path Failover CPF Figure 17 Tools Drive Operations Screen for CPF Tools Drive Operations To complete tape drive operations the tape drive must be operational and contain no media Select the desired operation Retrieve tape drive log Clean a tape drive Upload remove tape drive firmware for autoleveling O Force Control Path Failover 116 2 Select Force Control Path Failover and click Next The Force Control Path Failover screen displays see Figure 18 below All of the partitions that have control path failover enabled are listed The location and status of the tape drive that is currently serving as the control path are listed in the Active columns The location and status of the tape drive that is currently serving as the standby control path are listed in the Standby columns For each partition the following information is listed Column Indicates Active Drive Location of the current control path tape drive Act
7. e Not Ready The robotics system is not ready Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 23 Chapter 3 Understanding the User Interface Operator Panel Operator Panel Element Description Health status The health status field displays an icon representing the health of the library y Heart Library is in good health no open or unopened diagnostic tickets are present A Triangle Library health is degraded library contains open or unopened low or high priority diagnostic tickets Exclamation point Immediate attention is required library contains open or unopened urgent diagnostic tickets Active display The active display provides information or menu items according to the selected menu item or operation The default home screen displays the number and state of partitions tape drives storage slots and E slots The alternate home screen displays the number and state of the I E slots and provides access to unlock I E stations Menu bar The menu bar displays the function associated with each of the navigation selection buttons The button function changes with each menu Common functions are navigation up down left right next and menu selection select apply exit yes no cancel Navigation Selection Buttons The physical buttons enable you to navigate menus and start and stop library operations according to the functions listed in the button
8. 4 Click Apply 5 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Configuring Control Paths A control path is the connection between a partition and host application The control path connection is made through a designated tape drive When you create a partition the library automatically assigns the first tape drive in the partition as the control path You can modify the control path at any time Only one tape drive can be selected as the control path per partition In the event that the tape drive control path connection to the host 66 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Configuring Control Paths application fails you can manually select a different control path tape drive for the partition Note You might need to modify settings in your host application as a result of modifying the control path See your host application documentation for more information You can only configure control paths via the Web client Web Client 1 Select Setup gt Control Path 2 If more than one partition exists select a partition and click Next 3 To select a new control path for the partition select a tape drive from the list of tape drives 4 To delete the control path for the partition locate the tape drive that is currently selected as the control path and clear the selection 5 Click Apply 6 Save the library configuration se
9. Exporting Data SKM servers provide a unique encryption key for each tape cartridge Encryption Keys that is encrypted For another i e destination SKM server to read tapes encrypted by your SKM server i e source you need to export the encryption keys used to encrypt those tapes and send them to the destination server Note This function is available to administrators and only applies to SKM servers Both SKM servers must be connected and operational in order to import encryption keys 206 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Performing Scalar Key Manager Functions Available on the Library To export encryption keys 1 Before starting this process read and follow the sequence of steps outlined in Sharing Encrypted Tape Cartridges on page 203 2 From the Tools menu select EKM Management gt Encryption Key gt Export Figure 42 Exporting Encryption Keys Tools SKM Encryption Key Export Encryption Key Export allows you to export selected encryption keys from the attached SKM server to a file so that the encryption keys can be imported into another target library Note Make sure the certificate from the target library has been imported and can be selected for the encryption key export operation Depending on the number of keys being exported this operation could take several minutes Certificate Name Used For Export Export Used O Export Current Export Sel
10. You can modify e mail notifications on the Web client only Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 73 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Working With E mail Notifications Web Client 1 Select Setup gt Notification gt Setup The Setup System E mail Notifications screen displays The screen lists all the e mail notifications that have been created 2 Select an address to modify and click Modify The Modify System E mail Notification screen displays 3 Modify any of the following settings e Under the New Settings column select the Enabled check box to enable e mail notification Clear the Enabled check box to disable e mail notification e Under the New Settings column select a new filter level from the Filter Level drop down list For more information on filter levels see Working With E mail Notifications on page 71 e In the E mail Address text box type a new e mail address e In the E mail Comment text box type a new comment Note Only letters numbers spaces and hyphens are allowed in this fields Do not use any special characters like commas apostrophes to name a few 4 Click Apply 5 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Deleting E mail Administrators can delete an e mail notification when it is no longer Notifications needed Note The default techsup quantum com e mail notification cannot be deleted but the notification c
11. e Service and Support Web site Register products license software browse Quantum Learning courses check backup software and operating system support and locate manuals FAQs firmware downloads product updates and more in one convenient location Benefit today at http Awww quantum com ServiceandSupport Index aspx e Telephone Support Find contact information for your location at http www quantum com ServiceandSupport Contacts ProductSelect Index aspx e eSupport Submit online service requests update contact information add attachments and receive status updates via e mail Online Service accounts are free from Quantum That account can also be used to access Quantum s Knowledge Base a comprehensive repository of product support information Sign up today at http www quantum com osr e StorageCare Guardian Securely links Quantum hardware and the diagnostic data from the surrounding storage ecosystem to Quantum s Global Services Team for faster more precise root cause diagnosis StorageCare Guardian is simple to set up through the Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide XXV Preface Worldwide End User Product Warranty xxvi Internet and provides secure two way communications with Quantum s Secure Service Center More StorageCare Guardian information can be found at http www quantum com ServiceandSupport Services GuardianInformation Index aspx Quantum Vision
12. 1 Select Setup gt Date amp Time 2 Refer to the library Web client online help for detailed instructions To view the help click the Help icon in the upper right corner of the screen amp The library supports the Network Time Protocol NTP NTP allows you to synchronize the library date and time with other components in your IT infrastructure Administrators can either modify the date and time zone settings manually or configure NTP If NTP is enabled the time zone and IP addresses or host names if DNS is configured of at least one NTP server must be configured on the library Contact your network administrator for NTP server IP address information Caution Using two NTP servers can cause incorrect time calculations You should use either one NTP server or more than two but not exactly two Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 47 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Setting the Date Time and Time Zone Details on NTP settings include e Atleast one NTP server must be configured and available e NTP is enabled on the Date amp Time screen When NTP is enabled you cannot manually configure date and time For more information on setting date and time manually see Setting the Date and Time Manually on page 47 e You can enter an IP address or host name if DNS is configured for the NTP servers e NTP server IP addresses must be entered in the proper format See Configuring Network Sett
13. 304 to peripheral devices such as storage subsystems The acronym is pronounced scuzzy Server A powerful centralized computer or program designed to provide information to clients smaller computers or programs upon request Setup wizard A tool for initially configuring the library It appears the first time the user starts the library However it can be used to modify configurable items anytime after the initial configuration Sled The hardware that houses tape drives in the library SMI S Storage Management Initiative Specification An industry standard SMI S application programming interface API developed by SNIA that facilitates the management of multi vendor devices in a storage area networks SANs environment Snapshot A rapid point in time image of a volume created initially on the same disk as the original by duplicating metadata rather than copying the full data set Snapshots are often used to protect against data corruption viruses etc or to create test or pre production environments Snapshots are also often used as a first step for creating non disruptive point in time backups and for copying datasets to a second disk to create a full duplicate copy of the volume Snapshots are created on disk and in the same format as the original data Snapshots are also referred to as point in time copies and as shadow copies SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol The protocol governing network management
14. Controller The PCB or system that translates computer data and commands into a form suitable for use by the storage disks CRU Customer Replaceable Unit The smallest hardware component that can be replaced at a customer installation by a customer Default A value or setting that is selected by the hardware or software unless specified otherwise by the user DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol A protocol for assigning dynamic IP addresses to devices on a network DHCP supports a mix of static and dynamic IP addresses Diagnostic ticket A ticket that alerts service personnel and customers of an issue with the library Diagnostic tickets identify which library components are most likely causing the issue When possible a diagnostic ticket provides instructions for resolving the issue Directory A file that contains a list of other files Directory is short for directory file Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Glossary Drivers Software programs that enable a computer to communicate with hard drives CD ROM drives printers and other peripherals Drivers are stored on a hard disk and loaded into memory at boot up E Element ID Logical An address used by a library to locate and track library component The address is specified in programming logic rather than on the physical location of a component within a library When a logical library is used the logical element ID masks the physical element ID Ele
15. Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 199 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Performing Scalar Key Manager Functions Available on the Library 200 e If automatic key generation succeeds a RAS ticket informs you the keys were generated and instructs you to back up both SKM server keystores as soon as possible e If automatic key generation fails the library tries again every time a new key is requested until the keys are 90 percent depleted At that point the library stops trying to auto generate keys and issues a RAS ticket stating that you must manually generate keys See Manually Manually Generating Data Encryption Keys on page 200 and back up both SKM server keystores Generating Data Encryption Keys When 100 Depleted If an SKM server completely runs out of data encryption keys for a particular library that library generates a diagnostic ticket which states that you have run out of data encryption keys and that the library attempted to fail over to the other SKM server If this happens it is imperative that you manually generate a new set of data encryption keys on the depleted server immediately and then back up both SKM server keystores See Manually Generating Data Encryption Keys on page 200 Manually Generating Data Encryption Keys To manually generate data encryption keys you need to temporarily disable Library Managed Encryption LME on a partition and then enable it again Enabling LME on a p
16. 5 Click the Test Settings button to test all the new or changed LDAP settings See Testing LDAP Settings on page 93 for more information 6 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 92 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Testing LDAP Settings Configuring Kerberos Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Working With LDAP User Accounts Remote Authentication The Test Settings button tests communication between the library and the LDAP server and tests the currently applied LDAP settings If there are any problems an error message identifies the problem area If you change the LDAP settings click Apply before using this button Otherwise any changes you made will be lost and will not be tested To test the settings you must enter a user name and password then click the button The user you use for the test must be a member of both the Library User Group and the Library Admin Group on the LDAP server Since most normal users will not be members of both these groups you may need to create a special or temporary user specifically for this purpose After configuring LDAP settings save the library configuration Use Kerberos if you want extra security with remote authentication You can configure the Kerberos settings any time after the initial library configuration Before you can configure Kerberos you need to generate the service keytab file on your Kerb
17. Preface WARNING Before operating this product read all instructions and warnings in this document and in the System Safety and Regulatory Information Guide EEAS mA AARRE RA RENARE SHA hA KAA Was WEARER PTMMANLGRARK RERRRAABS PH BARR ADVERSAL L s alle instruktioner og advarsler i dette dokument og i Vejledning om system sikkerheds og lovgivningsoplysninger for produktet betjenes Avant d utiliser ce produit lisez la totalit des instructions et avertissements AVERTISSEMENT de ce document et du Guide d informations sur le syst me la s curit et la r glementation Lesen Sie vor der Verwendung dieses Produkts alle Anweisungen und Warnhinweise in diesem Dokument und im System Safety and Regulatory HINWIES Information Guide Info Handbuch System Sicherheit und Richtlinien NIN NNATNAI Naw 73 NX RNP AT ANIN WW NYNA 197 MATN AMZN NINO NIAwWN NWN YTN JOTA I AT MON COM MERAT SAMIC AME BKUPVLATA RE RAG f RT a ii P s BS ZARJIFIRELTODTATOZALERESRACHESU ag Ol MSS BSS Mol o A g AAR otal g RAZ OHA o 2 85 DE NAMAD ENS AHAA xxii Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Preface BCEMM MHCTPYKUMAMN M NpeAyNpPe GeEHMAMM NPVBEACHHbIMM B DAaHHOM AOKyMeHTe n B CnpaBoyHOM pyKOBOACTBE NO yCTPOMCTBY TEXHNKE 6e30NacHOcTu MN AevCTBYIOLUMM HOPMaTHBaM NPEQYNPEKQEHNE Antes de u
18. System SUMMALY 6 6 eee eee eee 30 Subsystem Status 0 0 0 0 ee 30 Menu WeeGS ci 538 ake ee ek eee ls aa aes ae eae 31 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library 35 Using the Setup Wizard 1 0 00 ee 37 Default Configuration aasa aaaea 38 Configuring Network Settings 0 0 0 0 00 cece eee ee 38 Library Host Name 0 000 ee 39 DHCP 2c ee manea S00 Lee waa Ye eee eee ee Oe 40 IP Addresses aaraa cici hi Doa aa tee 40 Default Gateway Subnet Mask Network Prefix and DNS Addresses ss apane a a i aa aende ta be T a eai kka 41 Configuring SNMP Settings a s sanaa 42 Registering External Management Applications 42 Enabling SNMP Versions 0000 eee eens 44 Enabling SNMP Authentication Traps 44 Modifying the SNMP Community String 45 Downloading the SNMP MIB 00000 2 ee eee 45 iv Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Contents Setting the Date Time and Time Zone 0000 cee eee 46 Setting the Date and Time Manually 47 Setting the Date and Time Using the Network Time Protocol 47 Setting the Time Zone 0000 cece ee 48 Setting Daylight Saving Time 2000 cee eee 49 Working With Partitions 0 000 02 ee 49 Automatically Creating Partitions 000005 51 Manually Creating Partitions 000 eee eee 52 Modifying Partitions 0 0 0 2 cee ee 55 Deleting Part
19. Web Client Creating or Accessing a Template 1 From the menu bar select Reports gt Advanced Reporting and then select the desired report The configuration screen for that report appears 3 For anew template in the Report Templates box at the bottom of the screen type a name for the template in the empty field next to the Save button The name can have a maximum of 15 characters You can use only lowercase letters numbers and the underscore character _ in template names Figure 19 Template and Report Data Functions Report Templates Report Data Load weeklyrpt Delete Save newreportname _ Reload Delete Delete ji T 21 ji resd 1 4 A i N w LUi ji J en X J 1 Loads the selected template Template drop down list Deletes the selected template Saves a report configuration as a template Type name of new report here OIN BI WWJ N Reloads the data from the library log file to the Internet browser Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 123 Chapter 5 Advanced Reporting Using Advanced Reporting Reports Loading and Reloading Advanced Reporting Data 124 7 Lists the number of records currently loaded in the Internet browser for this report 8 Deletes all the Advanced Reporting data 4 Click Save The report appears in the drop down list next to the Load button Usi
20. You should do this when you remove replace or service a component that does not require you to remove the library into or out of a rack or desktop kit For a description of the diagnostic subtests see Running the Installation and Verification Test IVT on page 262 264 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Running the IVT Diagnostic Subtests Individually Robotics Tape Drive and Magazine Tests Details about running the diagnostic subtests include Running a diagnostic takes partitions offline and logs all users off of the Web client The operator panel displays progress of the diagnostic When a test begins its progress displays as Running Once a test completes its progress changes to either Passed or Failed Once a diagnostic test starts you cannot stop it You must let it run to completion For the tape drive and magazine diagnostics you may choose just one device to test or you can choose to test all The magazine diagnostic tests all the slots in the selected magazine s You can only perform the subtests from the operator panel Prerequisites for Running Diagnostic Subtests Certain prerequisites must be met in order to run the diagnostics Prior to running a diagnostic the library checks to make sure all the prerequisites are met If any is not the operator panel displays a message telling you how to resolve the issue Prerequisites include All
21. e Enc Cartridge encryption status U Unknown E Encrypted N Not Encrypted You can access and configure this log from only the Web client Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 129 Chapter 5 Advanced Reporting Automatically E mailing Advanced Reporting Reports and Logs Web Client 1 To view save or e mail the report select Reports gt Log Viewer 2 Select Media Usage Log from the list of logs and click Next Automatically E mailing Advanced Reporting Reports and Logs You can configure the library to automatically e mail Advanced Reporting logs and reports to specified recipients on a daily or weekly basis Note Before the library can send e mail notifications you must configure the library e mail account For information on how to configure the e mail account see Configuring the Library E Mail Account on page 75 You can create up to 20 e mail recipients If you want to send the same recipient a different set of reports you can enter the same e mail address more than once with different reports selected for each Each entry counts as a unique recipient toward the 20 total 130 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Creating a Recipient Chapter 5 Advanced Reporting Automatically E mailing Advanced Reporting Reports and Logs Note Duplicate entries are not allowed A duplicate entry means the same recipient is set to receive the exact same reports in two different entrie
22. e User login ID of the person who made the change The Media Encryption Status section of the log displays the most recent encryption status for a given piece of media This section provides the following specific information e Timestamp date and time of any dismount operations which captured the encryption status e Barcode barcode label information e Medium Serial Number tape cartridge serial number Drive Serial Number serial number of drive that determined the tape cartridge encryption status Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 211 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Performing Scalar Key Manager Functions Available on the Library Figure 44 Audit Log Screen 212 e Partition Name name of the partition e Encrypted encryption status established upon the dismount operation 1 To access the EKM Audit Log from the Web client select Tools gt Audit Log The Tools EKM Management EKM Audit Log screen appears 2 You can perform the following actions on the Audit Log Filter the range of data shown by date Select a Start Date and End Date and then click Filter to show the data for the specified dates Show more data Click the green arrows at the bottom of each report or enter the page number you want to view in the Page box Refresh the data Click Refresh E mail the data Enter the address of the person you want to send the report to in the box provided at the bottom of the scr
23. 1 Select Reports gt About Library 2 Press Next to scroll through all the screens Press Exit to exit at any time Web Client Select Reports gt System Information Viewing the Location of the Robot You can set the operator panel to view the robot position as library operations are performed This view is helpful in diagnosing any library problems because you can see where the robot is whether it contains a tape and the finger position If you perform an operation from the remote interface the operator panel displays the operation as it is performed If you perform an operation from the operator panel once complete you can return to the Robot View to view the completed operation status Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 217 Chapter 8 Getting Information About the Library Viewing the Location of the Robot Note The operator panel does not update the left side graphical display until the motion is complete success or failed On the operator panel do the following Note If you are viewing the alternate home screen select Menu to return to default home screen 1 Select Tools gt Robotic View robot view nove vedia Tape drive Move Media Current or last Dee iee ese Operation Robot f performed location Status FAILED Operation status outage Details The left graphical section depicts the top down current location of the robot on the X axis e The numbers indicate the
24. If the self test detects a problem the library generates a diagnostic ticket that identifies the component that is likely causing the problem If the problem is not severe the library continues to provide full functionality to all unaffected partitions The tickets are assigned one of three priority levels e Urgent The highest level of priority A ticket with urgent priority indicates that a failure has occurred or a serious condition exists within the library that requires immediate corrective action In most cases a hardware component is no longer functioning at an acceptable level or has failed Typical library operations required for backup or restore operations are either not possible or highly unreliable This level of priority is conveying a critical issue e High The middle level of priority A ticket with high priority indicates that a condition exists within the library that impacts system performance redundancy or just a specific host application Typical library operations can continue without immediate corrective action although an application may have failed and may need to be restarted A user should investigate the condition and correct the problem soon This level of priority is conveying a warning message e Low The lowest level of priority A ticket with low priority indicates that an abnormal condition existed within the library that warrants investigation and correction but the nature of the condition ma
25. Quantum Vision software enables simplified monitoring and reporting of Quantum DXi disk based systems and Scalar tape libraries Especially powerful for customers with multiple disk systems or a combination of Quantum disk and tape libraries working together Vision puts you in control to make better decisions that will prevent issues manage resources efficiently and improve uptime Vision can aggregate data across multiple systems provide system status and display trend information all from a single console More quantum Vision information can be found at http www quantum com Products Software QuantumVision Index aspx Latest Library Firmware You can view a listing of the latest version of library firmware on the following Web site http Awww quantum com ServiceandSupport SoftwareandDocumentationDownloads S 40 Index aspx and click the Firmware tab If your library has an Internet connection you can log into your library to view the latest firmware version available Click Tools gt Update Library Firmware The screen displays the firmware currently loaded on your library and the latest available firmware Follow instructions in Chapter 9 Updating Firmware to upgrade Firmware For further assistance or if training is desired contact the Quantum Customer Support Center For more information on the Quantum Worldwide End User Standard Limited Product Warranty http www quantum com pdf QuantumWarranty pdf Qu
26. Shutting Down the Library on page 140 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 139 Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Shutting Down Restarting Turning Off and Removing Power 3 Turn OFF the library by pressing the power button on the front panel see Turning Off the Library on page 143 4 Remove library power by disconnecting the power supply cord from the power supply on the back of the library If there are two power supplies remove the cords to both See Completely Removing Library Power on page 144 Shutting Down the Shutdown shuts down the library s operating system and firmware Library closes data and log files and retracts the picker so that a tape cartridge or the picker fingers are not stuck part way into a tape drive or magazine slot If the robot was in the middle of a get or put operation it will attempt to complete the operation before shutting down by either pushing the cartridge into the destination slot or removing it completely from the slot and stopping in a safe location from which it can move again once power is restored Once the shutdown is complete you can safely turn off the library by pressing the power button on the front panel see Turning Off the Library on page 143 Operator Panel 1 Make sure the connected host applications are not sending commands to the library and that all library operations have stopped 2 Press Actions gt Shutdown gt Shutdown Library
27. e Logical Serial Number Addressing e Manual Cartridge Assignment e SNMP e SMI S e Power Save Unload Assist When Unload Assist is enabled the library will unload tape drives when a move command from the tape drive is received When Unload Assist is disabled the tape drive must be unloaded prior to a move command or the move command will fail This setting is enabled by default Operator Panel 1 Select Setup gt System Settings gt Unload Assist 2 Press Modify 3 Use the Up and Down buttons to select Enabled or Disabled and press Apply Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 97 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Configuring System Settings Logical Serial Number Addressing 98 4 Make another selection or press Exit 5 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 The library uses the actual tape drive serial numbers by default logical SN addressing is disabled Enabling logical SN addressing enables the library to assign logical serial numbers to all tape drives in the library Specifically the library assigns a logical serial number to a tape drive in a specific location not the serial number of the particular tape drive If the tape drive is then replaced by another tape drive in the same library location the logical serial number remains the same From the host application s perspective the replacement tape drive is the same as the original This
28. in the Storage Slots section The current user s login privileges determine which partitions are displayed see Privilege Levels on page 80 You can quickly gauge the health of the library by observing the color of the three subsystem status buttons located at the bottom of the home page These buttons provide quick access to information about the health of the library for faster recovery if problems occur You can select the buttons to view diagnostic tickets that report problems in the subsystems The three subsystems are e Library Represents connectivity control cooling power and robotics e Drives Represents tape drive components such as tape drives tape drive firmware and tape drive sleds e Media Represents media components such as cartridges and barcode labels Each button has three states indicated by color The three states are amp Green check mark No diagnostic tickets exist or if any tickets do exist they have all been closed A Yellow exclamation point The library contains open or unopened low or high priority diagnostic tickets X Red X mark The library contains open or unopened urgent diagnostic tickets If the color of a subsystem button is red or yellow you can click the button to display the corresponding Diagnostic Tickets screen This screen lists library drives or media tickets depending on which button was selected See About Diagnostic Tick
29. no letters or other characters The first digit of the code is highlighted Use the Up and Down buttons to select a number for the first digit then press Right to go to the second digit As you move off the digit you created it displays as a symbol so that only the digit you are working on displays actual numbers If you need to view or change a digit press the Left button When you are finished creating the admin password press Right until the Validate Password prompt appears Re enter the password the same way you created it When finished press Apply A confirmation screen displays Press OK The library logs the session out and the operator panel displays the login screen with the User ID of admin highlighted 8 Press Apply to go to the password line 9 Using the directional buttons enter the admin password you 10 11 12 13 14 15 created and press Apply Select Setup gt Account Settings gt Password Settings Press the Down button to highlight User Password and press Modify Disabled is highlighted Press the Up button to change the setting to Enabled Press Apply Create and validate the user password the same way you created the admin password above Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 85 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Working With Local User Accounts and Passwords Disabling Passwords on
30. passwords privileges and partition access On the operator panel only three unique accounts names are allowed and the user names and privileges cannot be changed the only things you can change are the passwords on the user and admin accounts The accounts and corresponding privilege levels are Account Privilege Level admin Administrator user User service Service Only service users may use this account You cannot change the password for this account See Privilege Levels on page 80 for a description of administrator and user privileges In order to use logins and passwords you must set the passwords for at least the admin account You can only do this via the operator panel You can enable just the admin password and NOT the user password However you cannot enable just the user password Operator Panel You start out by creating the admin account password Once created you are logged out and need to log back in using the admin password Then you can create the user account password Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Working With Local User Accounts and Passwords Select Setup gt Account Settings gt Password Settings Admin Password is highlighted Press Modify Disabled is now highlighted 3 Press the Up button to change the setting to Enabled Press Apply 5 You are prompted to create the password The password is a 4 digit code
31. present a different personality capacity or both to a host It is a representation of real physical elements combined to create a grouping that is different from the physical library Also a logical portion of the physical library that is viewed by the host as if it is a complete library Partitions present the appearance of multiple separate libraries for purposes of file management access by multiple users or dedication to one or more host application Pathname A list of directories separated by slashes and ending with the name of a directory or nondirectory file A pathname is used to trace a path through the file structure to locate or identify a file Picker The robotic hand that handles cartridges Point to Point A Fibre Channel topology that consists of a dedicated connection between two devices a sending device and a receiving device R Rack Mount An industry standard communication and computer equipment rack cabinet S SAN Storage Area Network A dedicated network that connects storage devices and servers in a pool providing consolidated storage and storage management Storage interconnects between many initiators and target devices The SAN allows for sharing resources target devices among multiple servers initiators SCSI Small Computer System Interface A set of standards for a high speed parallel interface that connects processing devices Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 303 Glossary
32. s Guide Chapter 9 Updating Firmware Updating and Autoleveling Tape Drive Firmware tape drive firmware images You may however upload separate tape drive firmware images to use instead such as a patch or upgrade provided by Quantum see Uploading Tape Drive Firmware Used in Autoleveling on page 242 If you upload a patch the patch will display instead of the baseline image although the baseline image will remain hidden Tape drives will be autoleveled to the patch If you delete the patch then baseline image will reappear on the screen and the tape drives will autolevel to the baseline image see Deleting Tape Drive Firmware Used in Autoleveling on page 244 e If you upgrade library firmware the baseline tape drive firmware for that version of library firmware will overwrite the existing baseline tape drive firmware images If you did not previously upload a patch all the tape drives will be autoleveled to the new baseline If you previously uploaded a patch the patch remains and tape drive firmware will remain autoleveled to the patch You will need to delete the patch in order to have the tape drives autoleveled to the new baseline see Deleting Tape Drive Firmware Used in Autoleveling on page 244 e If you downgrade library firmware the baseline tape drive firmware for that version of library firmware will overwrite the existing baseline tape drive firmware images as well as any patches you may have uploaded pri
33. s Guide 251 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting About Diagnostic Tickets Closing Diagnostic Tickets Automatically 252 5 You can also close all tickets at once by clicking the Close All Tickets button Caution Be careful when pressing the Close All Tickets button This closes all diagnostic tickets even if they are not resolved It is recommended that each diagnostic ticket be viewed analyzed and closed individually Note To display all closed tickets select the Include Closed Tickets check box at the bottom of the screen The Tools All Diagnostic Tickets screen refreshes with the Resolve button unavailable for all closed diagnostic tickets When you reboot the library all currently open diagnostic tickets are closed automatically If any errors occur during the reboot the library issues new tickets Automatic ticket closure occurs only when you intentionally initiate a reboot by either restarting the library shutting down the library or upgrading library firmware Automatic ticket closure will not occur if the library shuts down unexpectedly or if the power cord is unplugged Disabling or Enabling this Feature Automatic ticket closure is enabled by default You can enable or disable this feature from the operator panel 1 Select Setup gt System Settings 2 Press Modify 3 Press Up to change setting as desired 4 Press Apply Viewing Closed Diagnostic Tickets You can view closed diagnostic tic
34. see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 5 If the library has an Internet connection use the Web client to update the library to the latest firmware If the library does not have an Internet connection use a Web browser to select a specific firmware file with which to update the library Update using the Web Client a From the Web client return to Tools gt Update Library Firmware The Tools Update Library Firmware screen displays b Click the check box next to Update library firmware with the version from the Quantum Support Web site Note If a newer version is already installed on your library you will receive a warning message c Click Read EULA to read and click Accept to accept the End User License Agreement d Go to Step 6 238 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 9 Updating Firmware Updating Library Firmware Browse for a Specific File a Using a Web browser connected to the Internet go to http www quantum com ServiceandSupport SoftwareandDocumentationDownloads S 40 Index aspx and click the Firmware tab b Download the library firmware to a known location on your computer c From the Web client return to Tools gt Update Library Firmware The Tools Update Library Firmware screen displays d Click Browse e Locate the library firmware file and click Open f Go to Step 6 6 Click Apply A confirmation dialog box displays asking you to confirm that y
35. the Operator Panel Modifying Passwords on the Operator Panel 86 If you no longer want to use passwords on the operator panel you can disable them Once you disable the admin password the user password is also automatically disabled You can only do this on the operator panel Operator Panel 1 Select Setup gt Account Settings gt Password Settings Admin Password is highlighted Press Modify to modify the Admin password Enabled is now highlighted 3 Press the Down button to change the setting to Disabled Press Apply 5 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Once passwords are created you can modify them Operator Panel N fF wu A WN Select Setup gt Account Settings gt Modify Password Use the Up and Down buttons to select admin or user Press Apply Enter the current password and press Apply Enter a new password and press Apply Re enter the new password to validate it and press Apply Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Working With LDAP User Accounts Remote Authentication Resetting Passwords on If you forget your operator panel passwords and cannot log in you the Operator Panel must reset the passwords Resetting the passwords disables them and deletes both the admin and user passwords This means
36. 3 Press Yes to confirm A shutdown in progress message displays on the operator panel see Figure 22 Figure 22 Shutdown in Progress Message Shutdown in Progress May take several minu Do not power library until further notificat 140 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Shutting Down Restarting Turning Off and Removing Power 4 Wait until the ready to power down message displays see Figure 23 Figure 23 Ready to Power Down Message Ready to Power Down 5 Turn OFF the library by pressing the power button on the front panel Web Client 1 Press Operations gt System Shutdown 2 Select Shutdown and click Apply 3 Click OK to confirm 4 Wait until the ready to power down message displays on the operator panel see Figure 24 Figure 24 Ready to Power Down Message Ready to Power Down o gt 5 Turn OFF the library by pressing the power button on the front panel Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 141 Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Shutting Down Restarting Turning Off and Removing Power Restarting the Library Figure 25 Series of Restart Messages 142 Restart shuts down and then reboots the library s operating system and firmware During the reboot the library performs an inventory of the tape drives and magazine slots If any tape drives or partitions were previously taken offline res
37. Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Working With LDAP User Accounts Remote Authentication 90 The library supports all LDAP servers You can also use Kerberos for added security For specific instructions on configuring Kerberos see Configuring Kerberos on page 93 Web Client 1 Select Setup gt User Management gt Remote Authentication The Setup Remote Authentication screen displays 2 Under Authentication Type do one of the following To enable LDAP select LDAP and continue with Step 3 To disable LDAP select Local Only and continue with Step 4 To modify LDAP configuration settings continue with Step 3 3 Obtain the following LDAP parameters from your network administrator and enter them in the fields provided Server URI The Uniform Resource Identifier URI of the LDAP server where user account information is stored The URI includes the LDAP server host name or IP address and can include the LDAP server network port Port 389 is the default Examples ldap hostname 389 ldap 10 50 91 103 ldap mycompany com LDAPS Optional See Configuring Secure LDAP on the Library on page 89 StartTLS Optional See Configuring Secure LDAP on the Library on page 89 Install TLS CA Certificate Optional See Configuring Secure LDAP on the Library on page 89 Principal An LDAP user login ID with permissions to search the LDAP directory The library logs into LDAP using this ID
38. Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Taking a Tape Drive Online or Offline 3 Toggle the Online Offline button to the desired mode Note If you change the mode of a control path tape drive to offline a caution dialog displays asking you to confirm the mode change For information on control path tape drives see Configuring Control Paths on page 66 4 Click Apply 174 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Encryption Key Management EKM is a licensable feature You must have an EKM license installed on your library in order to use the encryption key management features described in this chapter For more information on licensing see Adding or Upgrading Licensable Features on page 68 The Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 support two encryption key management systems which are described in Table 6 Table 6 Encryption Key Management Systems Encryption System Supported Tape Drives Supported Media Scalar Key Manager SKM LTO 4 Fibre Channel and SAS LTO 5 Fibre Channel and SAS LTO 6 Fibre Channel and SAS LTO 4 LTO 5 and LTO 6 tape cartridges KMIP compliant key managers LTO 4 Fibre Channel and SAS LTO 5 Fibre Channel and SAS LTO 6 Fibre Channel and SAS LTO 4 LTO 5 and LTO 6 tape cartridges These systems work in conjunction with the library to generate protect store and manage encryption keys The keys are used by tape d
39. DHCP 40 diagnostic tickets about 248 log 227 viewing closing and resolving 248 249 diagnostics 267 EKM path 183 186 resetting a tape drive 268 robotics get put 269 disabling library managed encryption 202 disposal information 295 DNS addresses 41 downgrading library firmware 107 dust 15 E EKM about 175 license 14 path diagnostics 183 about 186 automatic 188 manual 187 e mail account library 75 e mail notifications about 71 creating 72 deleting 74 modifying 73 send snapshot 76 emergency power off procedure 308 144 encryption certificates exporting 204 importing 204 205 encryption key management see EKM encryption keys see data encryption keys encryption see EKM and SKM ESD precautions xxiii exiting an operation 25 exporting cleaning cartridges 168 data encryption keys 204 206 encryption certificates 204 tape cartridges 158 external management applications 42 F factory defaults resetting 270 fast scrolling 25 firmware library downgrading 107 library updating 235 tape drive autoleveling 240 tape drive updating 240 front panel 2 G gateway 41 generating data encryption keys 199 202 get put test 269 H health status icons 24 home page 28 29 host name 39 IE station opening 145 unlocking 145 IE station slots configuring 62 IE station unlocking more than one 146 ICMP 103 importing cleaning cartridges 166 data encryption keys 204 208 en
40. I E Station Slots on page 62 e You can move a cartridge from one location to another within a partition You can also move unassigned cartridges from the I E station to available locations in the library If you move an unassigned tape cartridge into a slot in a partition it will become assigned to that partition and will only be available for use by that partition Note If you move an unassigned tape cartridge directly from the I E station to a tape drive you will not be able to perform an unload operation on that tape drive later The tape drive can only unload a cartridge if that cartridge came from a storage slot in the partition You will need to perform a move operation to move the tape drive to a storage slot or back to the I E station Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Performing Media Operations e Moving cartridges using the library Web client may necessitate performing an inventory on your host system You can also move cartridges using your host application See your host application documentation for more information e If the partition is online it will be taken offline before the move is performed and brought back online after the move is complete You will be asked to confirm that you want to take the partition offline e You can select only the partitions to which you have been given access e You cannot move media directly from one
41. Index aspx and click the Firmware tab If needed obtain the firmware download file from Quantum Support and place it in a known location on your computer Verify with the release notes or Quantum Support that you are installing the correct version of tape drive firmware for your library For support contact information see Getting More Information or Help on page xxv Select Tools gt Drive Operations The Tools Drive Operations screen displays Select Upload remove tape drive firmware for autoleveling and click Next The Tape Drive Firmware Autolevel screen displays The screen lists the vendor type interface type form factor and firmware revision number for all tape drives that the library supports whether or not they are installed in the library Click Upload The Upload Tape Drive Images screen displays The screen lists the vendor type form factor and interface type of all tape drives installed in the library You can only upload tape drive images for the listed tape drives Click Browse 8 Locate the tape drive firmware image file and click Open 9 Click Apply The Progress Window displays The Progress Window contains information on the action elapsed time and status of the requested operation Do one of the following e If Complete appears in the Progress Window the tape drive firmware upload completed Check to see if a diagnostic ticket was generated for this operation For information on
42. Key Server Addresses s a gusa s ieii e a d Ea seers es e EEE OEE PS 180 Step 5 Install TLS Communication Certificates on the UDa sen nend ghia biada dee E aa eed dae 183 Step 6 Run EKM Path Diagnostics saasaa aeea 183 Step 7 Configure Partitions for Library Managed Encryption 183 Step 8 Save the Library Configuration 186 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Contents EKM Path Diagnostics 0 0000 c eee eee 186 DeSCrIPUON axa vis bebe de bege ge oe d rununnar REEE 186 Failure Scenarios 2 0 00000 eee 187 Running Manual EKM Path Diagnostics 187 Enabling Automatic EKM Path Diagnostics 188 Viewing Tape Drive Encryption Settings 0000 189 Installing TLS Certificates on the Library 005 189 Checking for Current Certificates 000 190 Installing Quantum Supplied TLS Certificates on the Library 191 Installing Your Own TLS Certificates on the Library 193 Performing Scalar Key Manager Functions Available on the Library 196 Generating Data Encryption Keys 00002000 199 Sharing Encrypted Tape Cartridges 0 203 Exporting Encryption Certificates 000 204 Importing Encryption Certificates 000 205 Exporting Data Encryption Keys 00000 eee 206 Importing Data Encryption Keys 2000000 208 Accessing the SKM Server Logs
43. Library Configuration on page 106 Note Power cycling powering the library on and off is not necessary to configure the library Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 35 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library This chapter covers 36 Using the Setup Wizard Configuring Network Settings Configuring SNMP Settings Setting the Date Time and Time Zone Working With Partitions Configuring Cleaning Slots Configuring I E Station Slots Configuring Tape Drive Parameters Configuring Control Paths Adding or Upgrading Licensable Features Working With E mail Notifications Configuring the Library E Mail Account Setting Customer Contact Information Configuring the Service Port Working With Local User Accounts and Passwords Working With LDAP User Accounts Remote Authentication Setting the Session Timeout Configuring System Settings Configuring Security Settings Saving and Restoring the Library Configuration Registering the Library Changing Operator Panel Home Screen View Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Using the Setup Wizard Using the Setup Wizard WARNING Follow all setup and cabling instructions in the Scalar i40 and Scalar 180 Quick Start Guide before using the Setup Wizard When you first power on the library the operator panel displays the S
44. Light Emitting Diode The mode of data transmission for multimode cables with short wave optical transceivers Single mode cables by comparison use high powered long wave lasers Library A large scale tape device with robotics that can house multiple tape drives and a significant amount of tape cartridges Library Control Module See Contro module License key An absolute value that can only increase a licensed feature For example a license key can be applied to the library to enable unlicensed slots Logical library See Partition Loop With this Fibre Channel option the port operates with attached loop capable devices If a point to point device is attached the appliance is not able to communicate with it Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 301 Glossary 302 Loop ID A unique 7 bit value from 0 to 126 that represents the 127 valid AL_PAs physical addresses on a loop LTO Linear Tape Open A family of magnetic tape media that are open in the sense of not being owned by a single proprietor LTO comes in two formats Accelis and Ultrium Accelis is the fast access implementation while Ultrium is the high capacity implementation LUN Logical Unit Number A unique identifier used on a SCSI bus to distinguish between devices that share the same bus ALUN can be an end user a file or an application In storage technology a single large storage device might be divided into smaller pieces eith
45. Name Type a name for the local user account User names are limited to 1 12 lower case letters numbers and underscores _ For example john_usa Enter Password Type a password for the local user account Passwords are limited to 6 16 lower case alphanumeric characters and can also include underscores _ periods hyphens asterisks and the at symbol For example pass_19 Confirm Password Retype the password Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 81 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Working With Local User Accounts and Passwords Modifying Local User Accounts on the Web Client 82 6 Select Privilege Select a local user account privilege level by selecting either Admin or User For more information on users and administrators see Privilege Levels on page 80 If the new local user account was given user privileges click Next The Create User Account User Name screen displays where User Name is the name of the user account This screen lists all library partitions Select the library partitions that you want the user to access 9 Click Apply Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 After a local user account has been created administrators can modify the account settings such as the password privilege level and partition access You cannot modify the user name Instead you will need to delete the user account and cr
46. Receive the file of encryption keys from the source SKM server and save it in a known location on your computer 3 From the Tools menu select EKM Management gt Encryption Key gt Import 208 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Figure 43 Importing Data Encryption Keys Accessing the SKM Server Logs Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Performing Scalar Key Manager Functions Available on the Library Tools SKM Encryption Key Import Import encryption keys Note Import encryption keys from other libraries so tapes from those libraries can be used in this library Depending on the number of keys being imported this operation could take several minutes Encryption Key File Browse aah Click Browse to locate the saved file of encryption keys Click Open Click Apply to import the keys onto your SKM server N OO wu A Back up both SKM servers following the instructions in the Sca ar Key Manager User s Guide Caution You must back up both SKM servers every time you import data encryption keys to protect against catastrophic server failure In case of an incomplete import the library displays a message and generates a diagnostic ticket For instructions on what to do if this happens see Using the SKM Encryption Key Import Warning Log on page 210 The SKM server logs contain information about all activities performed by the SKM servers You should not need to retrieve these
47. Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 are configured with 5 I E station slots by default On the Scalar i40 you can configure 0 5 or 20 I E station slots Configured I E station slots are located in the right magazine for 5 the right front 5 are configured On the Scalar i80 you can configure 0 5 10 20 25 or 40 IVE station slots The table below lists slots that will be configured based on setting selected 62 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Table 4 Scalar i80 I E Slot Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Configuring I E Station Slots Configuration Setting Selected Slots Configured 5 Right top front 5 10 Right top front 5 Right bottom front 5 20 Right top 20 25 Right top 20 Right bottom front 5 40 Right top 20 Right bottom 20 You can configure zero I E station slots However configuring zero I E station slots has the following consequences e You cannot import and export data or cleaning cartridges using I E stations e You cannot manually clean tape drives with a cleaning cartridge using the operator panel e You will need to bulk load and bulk unload cartridges disrupting library operations see Bulk Loading Tape Cartridges on page 155 Note Before using the I E station to load and unload cartridges you need to unlock the I E station which allows you to slide the magazine out just far enough to access the I E station slots see Unlocking and Opening the I E Statio
48. Setup gt Configure Partitions gt Auto Create Partitions 2 Use the Up and Down buttons to select the number of partitions you want to create If the Up and Down buttons are not available you do not have available resources Modify or delete partitions to create resources 3 Press Apply 4 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Web Client 1 Select Setup gt Partitions 2 Click Automatic If the Automatic button is not visible you do not have available resources Modify or delete partitions to create resources The Automatically Create Partitions screen displays By default the library applies the Scalar i40 i80 library emulation type and Standard media barcode format to each partition You can change these settings by modifying the partition after it has been created see Modifying Partitions on page 55 3 Using the Partitions drop down list select the number of partitions to create 4 Click Apply 5 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Manually Creating You can manually create partitions any time after the initial Partitions configuration of the library The maximum number of partitions that can be created is equal to the number of tape drives in the library The library must contain at least one unallocated tape drive and one unallocated slot to manually create a partition If no unallocated tape drives o
49. The most likely causes are that the server is down not connected or not configured correctly on the library or that no TLS certificates are installed or the TLS certificates are invalid or expired At the bottom of the page a message indicates whether TLS certificates are currently installed If certificates are installed a table appears below the message containing information about the installed certificates 4 From the Select the Certificate Type to install drop down list select your encryption key management system SKM or KMIP Key Manager 5 Retrieve the certificate files as follows For SKM a Make sure the Use the Quantum Certificate Bundle check box is deselected b Click Browse to retrieve the Root Certificate File Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 195 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Performing Scalar Key Manager Functions Available on the Library c Click Browse to retrieve the Admin Certificate File d Inthe Admin Certificate Password field type the password used when you generated the certificate files e Click Browse to retrieve the Client Certificate File In the Client Certificate Password field type the password used when you generated the certificate files g If you used the same password for the client and admin certificates you can select the Use Admin s Password check box For KMIP Key Manager a Click Browse to retrieve the Root Certificate File b Click Browse to retrieve
50. To see the exact values of each item in the displayed chart move your mouse so that it hovers over the item you wish to see An information bubble displays with the values listed in it If you click on a bar point or slice the information bubble locks in place and the hovering feature turns off until you reload the chart The hovering feature does not work when the value equals zero Values of zero do not appear in Pie charts This report identifies how tape drive resources are utilized in your library You can use this report to help you determine the proper work load distribution between the tape drives in your library The following information is collected for each tape drive installed in the library Drive location module row Drive serial number Partition Megabytes read Megabytes written Time and date of mount UTC Time and date of dismount UTC Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 5 Advanced Reporting Using Advanced Reporting Reports e Media motion time in seconds e Tape cartridge barcode You can only access this report from the Web client Web Client 1 From the library menu bar select Reports gt Advanced Reporting gt Drive Resource Utilization The Drive Resource Utilization Report configuration page opens This may take several minutes 2 Configure the report by specifying the following e Date Range Specifies the range of time covered by the report Choose Last
51. With E mail Notifications Web Client 1 Select Setup gt Notification gt Setup The Setup System E mail Notifications screen displays The screen lists all e mail notifications that have been created 2 Click Create The Create System E mail Notification screen displays 3 In the Select Filter Level drop down list select the filter level to assign to the e mail notification For more information on filter levels see Working With E mail Notifications on page 71 4 In the Enter E mail Address text box type the e mail address that you want to receive e mail notifications Note Do not enter more than one e mail address in the Enter E mail Address text box If you need to send e mail notifications to multiple e mail addresses create an e mail notification for each e mail address 5 In the Enter E mail Comment text box type a comment optional Note Only letters numbers spaces and hyphens are allowed in this fields Do not use any special characters like commas apostrophes to name a few 6 Click Apply 7 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Modifying E mail Administrators can modify existing e mail notification settings at any Notifications time after the e mail notification is created Note The e mail address of the default technical support notification techsup quantum cannot be changed but the notification can be enabled or disabled
52. a list of cartridges in the I E station that are ready for import Identify the number of empty storage slots that appear in the Empty Partition Slots field The number of cartridges you can import is limited to the number of empty slots that exist in the partition Select the cartridges to import into the partition Note You can select all cartridges by selecting the top check box You can use the Filter by Barcode text box to filter the available cartridge barcodes Click the Help button next to the Find button for more information about filtering barcodes In addition if not all cartridges appear on the screen use the Page 1 of x arrows to view the additional cartridges Note Bold column headings in the table can be sorted For example selecting the Location column heading will sort by location coordinates Click Apply Click OK to confirm it is OK to take the partition offline The library imports the tape cartridge s into the first empty slot s in the partition Bulk loading is another way to load media into the library If zero I E station slots are configured you will always need to bulk load cartridges into the library If I E station slots have been configured you may want to perform an initial bulk load when you first start using your library The library will perform an inventory after the bulk load is complete Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 155 Chapter 6 Performing Library Opera
53. account or e mail notifications Web Client 1 Select Setup gt Notifications gt Advanced Reporting gt Receiver Addresses The Setup Advanced Reporting Receiver Addresses screen displays Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 131 Chapter 5 Advanced Reporting Automatically E mailing Advanced Reporting Reports and Logs Scalar i80 Setup Advanced Reporting Receiver Addresses System e mail notifications provide a means to automatically notify specified individuals of Advanced Reporting reports and logs Select Create Modify or Delete to configure advanced reporting notification receiver addresses E mail Address Day Time Reports to send co do ga 2 Click Create The Setup Advanced Reporting Receiver Address Configuration screen displays The screen lists all Advanced Reporting e mail notifications that have been created along with the day time the e mail is scheduled to be sent and which reports and logs will be sent 132 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 5 Advanced Reporting Automatically E mailing Advanced Reporting Reports and Logs Scalar i80 Setup Advanced Reporting Receiver Address Configuration Select reports and fill in e mail address for auto notifications Select Reports Drive Utilization C Media Integrity C Media Usage C Media Security Notification Day amp Time Daily v 00 00 E mail Address E
54. and the monitoring of network devices and their functions Similar in function to SAM except SNMP governs LAN whereas SAM governs SAN SSL Secure Sockets Layer A protocol that provides encrypted communications on the Internet SSL is layered beneath application protocols such as HTTP SMTP Telnet FTP Gopher and NNTP and is layered above the connection protocol TCP IP Storage device An appliance containing data that can be accessed added to changed or deleted by the user The storage media types include tapes and optical disks A storage device can bea single disk drive or constitute thousands of tapes in a large tape library Storage slot The physical home where a data cartridge resides Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Glossary Subsystem status A feature that provides predictive alerts warning of any loss of connectivity or device failure using local or remote alerts Subsystem status allows administrators to correct faults before they affect backup or other data transfer operations Tape drive A device that spins disks and tapes while it reads and writes data in storage TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The communications protocol used by the Internet It runs on top of Ethernet to provide high level networking services to applications Topology The logical and or physical arrangement of stations on a network Trap An SNMP alert that is sent when predefined condition
55. and will not result in a diagnostic ticket see About Diagnostic Tickets on page 248 Additionally the library makes sure nothing is physically blocking the magazine that could cause damage to library components before allowing you to release it 148 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Releasing Magazines Releasing Magazines Use this method when the library is turned ON via the User Interface Operator Panel 1 Select Actions gt Magazine 2 Select a magazine and press Release Note Only closed magazines are listed 3 Wait until the robot unlocks the magazine and the screen displays the Magazine is now unlocked message see Figure 28 Figure 28 Magazine Unlocked Message Magazine 15 now unlocked waiting for the magazine to be removed past the I E column if applicable 4 Pull outward on the magazine bezel handle to slide the magazine out as far as you wish or remove it completely Once you slide the magazine back into the slot all the way it locks again automatically If you do not open the magazine within 30 seconds it locks and you receive the following failure message Figure 29 Magazine Locked Fe p FAILURE Idle Magazine Unlock Timer Magazine was NOT removed The magazine has been locked Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 149 Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Releasing Magazines Web Cli
56. application to load tape drives Using the library to load tape drives may necessitate performing an inventory with the host application See your host application documentation for more information Details on loading tape drives include e The storage slot and tape drive must be assigned to the same partition e The tape cartridge must be compatible with the tape drive e If the partition is online it will be taken offline before the load operation is performed and brought back online after the operation is complete You will be asked to confirm that you want to take the partition offline Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Performing Media Operations e You can select only partitions to which you have been given access e Default tape drive locations are highlighted if the barcode field is empty or the field is cleared You can only load tape drives from the Web client Web Client 1 Select Operations gt Drive gt Load 2 If more than one partition exists select the partition that contains the tape drive you want to unload and click Next 3 The Load Drive Partition Vode screen displays where Partition is the name of the partition and Mode is the current mode of the partition online or offline 4 Inthe Select Media section select the cartridge you want to load into a tape drive Note You can use the Filter by Barcode text box to filter the avail
57. bar Not all buttons are functional for every operation See Navigating and Editing on the Operator Panel on page 25 for more information 24 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 3 Understanding the User Interface Operator Panel Navigating and Editing You use the four navigation selection buttons exclusively to move on the Operator Panel through the menus and commands on the operator panel From the default home screen the menu bar lists the four main menu headings From the alternate home screen you can select Menu to return to the default home screen to access the four main menu headings Press the button corresponding to a menu item to bring up the list of sub menu items The item you are currently on is highlighted Press the buttons corresponding to Up Down Left or Right to navigate to a desired menu item As you move through the items the highlighting moves with you so you always know which item you are on Press the button corresponding to Select to select a highlighted item or action This in turn brings up either another sub menu a screen where you can modify settings or perform operations or a screen displaying information To edit a modifiable field such as date time licenses IP address and so on use the Left and Right buttons to move through the field one segment at a time for license keys and passwords you will move one digit or letter at a time Use the Up and Down buttons to
58. contact Quantum Support see Getting More Information or Help on page xxv Privilege levels are manually assigned to user accounts created within the library Controlling access to screens and operations within the library preserves the integrity of the library and the data that is stored in it Note If passwords are not enabled on the operator panel all users have access to all privileges See Enabling and Creating Passwords on the Operator Panel on page 83 Three types of users are defined in Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 libraries e Administrators have access to the entire physical library and all of its partitions The library ships with a default administrator account The user name for the default administrator account is admin and the password is password You cannot modify or delete the user name for the default administrator account but you can modify the password If you misplace the password for the default administrator account contact Quantum Support For security purposes an administrator can prevent a service user from logging on to the library remotely from either the Web client or over the Ethernet service port The service user will still be able to log in to the library from the operator panel interface For more information see Remote Service Login on page 104 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Creating Local User Accounts on the Web Client Chapter 4 Configuring the Lib
59. contain storage and import export station slots for cartridges Each magazine has 20 slots arranged in four columns of five slots each The Scalar i40 contains two magazines the Scalar i80 contains four The right magazines provide up to five slots each for use as an import export I E station For more information on IE stations see Configuring I E Station Slots on page 62 Note Cartridges are gently restrained within the magazine by a detent found on the left side of each individual magazine bin slot To manually remove a cartridge pull a cartridge from the front or push on the cartridge from the rear of the magazine via an access hole Be gentle to avoid any bending of the top magazine cover sheet metal The library will run if one or more magazines is open or removed however it runs at reduced speed The library will not move a cartridge to an open or removed magazine but it will move a cartridge to any of the other installed magazines You can open the magazines using library software or manually For information see Releasing Magazines on page 148 For information on removing and replacing magazines see 6 66557 XX Scalar 140 and Scalar i80 Magazine Replacement Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 1 Description Library Components Magazine Slot Location Coordinates Each slot in the installed magazine is numbered with location coordinates The library location coordinate contains
60. correctly the operator panel displays a message letting you know how to fix it Once you fix the issue start over from Step 1 If all is in order the test begins Once complete if the test fails check the library diagnostic tickets to help determine and resolve the problem Running the Random Move Test 266 The random move test is a demonstration that consists of moving a scratch tape into random slots around the library Partitions are set offline and the test runs continuously until you stop it You can only run this test from the operator panel Operator Panel u A WN Install a scratch tape in the top IE station slot Assign the scratch tape to the System partition Select Tools gt Random Move Test Press Run Press Yes to set partitions offline log users off the Web client and continue with the test Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Performing Library Diagnostics 6 When you are ready to stop the test press Stop 7 When the operator panel displays the message that the test has stopped press OK Se ee ee oe SSS aq Performing Library Diagnostics The Diagnostics menu on the Web client contains tests you can run to determine if tape drives and robotics are working as they should Notes about Diagnostics include e Entering Diagnostics takes all your library partitions offline Be sure any crucial operations have stopped before you enter Diagnostics Wh
61. current library configuration information except for network settings date and time and license keys You can restore the other configurable items using a configuration file that was saved when the earlier version of library firmware was installed on the library or you can reconfigure your library s settings You can only restore the library configuration via the Web client Web Client 1 Select Tools gt Save Restore Configuration 2 Select Restore System Configuration 3 Click Apply 4 Use the next screens to browse to the saved configuration file and upload it to the library This operation saves your current library configuration and library firmware 5 Verify the drive firmware level and if necessary manually upgrade to the desired firmware level Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 107 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Registering the Library Registering the Library Registering the library activates the warranty After completing the initial setup of the library choose Setup gt Register Library on the Web client to access the online product registration form You cannot register the library from the operator panel Web Client Select Setup gt Register Library Changing Operator Panel Home Screen View From the operator panel you may choose to change the default home screen to an alternate home screen that facilitates easy I E unlock access displays the number of I E slots and the n
62. depress the release latch push straight in while gently pulling the magazine bezel handle to slide the magazine out 3 If the magazine is on the right side it will only slide out as far as the IE station To release the magazine fully 150 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Performing Media Operations e On the Scalar i40 and the bottom right magazine of the Scalar i80 reach under the open magazine and insert the tool directly into the access hole in the library chassis to depress the release latch while pulling outward on the magazine bezel handle e On the top right magazine of the Scalar i80 reach under the open magazine and press the release latch directly with your finger while pulling outward on the magazine bezel handle Figure 30 Magazine Release Latch Access Magazine release latch access holes Performing Media Operations This section describes how to import export load unload and move data cartridges in the library The following section Cleaning Tape Drives on page 163 describes how to perform similar operations with cleaning cartridges Note The information and procedures in this user s guide apply specifically to the library Web client and the operator panel user interface not to the host application Performing media operations through the library user interface may affect your host application See your host application documentation fo
63. diagnostic tickets must be closed I E station slots must be allocated minimum of five All magazines must be installed in the library two in the Scalar i40 four in the Scalar i80 A scratch tape must be in the top I E station slot The scratch tape must be assigned to the System partition The scratch tape must be compatible with all unloaded tape drives installed in the library For a list of supported media see Supported Media on page 283 For the tape drive diagnostics only at least one tape drive must be installed in the library All installed tape drives must be in the ready state You can check the Web client Setup gt Drive Settings for listing of which drives are in the ready state Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 265 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Running the Random Move Test Operator Panel 1 Make sure the prerequisites listed in Prerequisites for Running Diagnostic Subtests on page 265 are met Select Tools gt Diagnostics Select Robotics Test Tape Drive Test or Magazine Test and press Select For the tape drive or magazine test select which tape drive or magazine you want to test or select ALL then press Select Press Yes to set partitions offline log users off the Web client and continue with the test The library conducts a series of prerequisite checks to be sure everything is in order Each prerequisite is listed as the library checks it If something is not set up
64. drive 229 256 M magazines description 4 releasing 148 test 264 manual cartridge assignment 99 manual EKM path diagnostics 187 mask subnet 41 media barcode formats 53 menu trees 31 MIB SNMP 45 move test 266 moving tape cartridges 156 N navigation buttons 3 network interface 102 network prefix 41 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Index network settings changing 38 configuring 38 report 224 232 network time protocol 47 NTP 47 O online offline library 145 partitions 57 tape drives 172 open source license agreement 233 opening the I E station 145 operator panel buttons 25 changing home screen view 108 description 2 functions 22 layout 20 passwords 83 power save 101 P partitions about 49 access 57 automatic creation 51 deleting 55 description 11 manual creation 52 modifying 55 reports 231 taking online offline 57 viewing 56 passwords operator panel creating 83 disabling 86 misplaced 87 309 Index modifying 86 resetting 87 passwords Web client creating 81 default 80 136 misplaced 137 modifying 82 path diagnostics EKM 183 186 automatic 188 manual 187 popup blockers 26 power button 3 power save 101 power supply description 8 power off emergency 144 power on LED 3 privilege levels 80 public key 203 R random move test 266 registering the library 108 releasing magazines 148 remote access enabling disabling 10
65. e Unexpected Removal Detection During Library Operation e Expected Removal Detection From IE Slots During Library Operation Note These options are disabled by default Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 127 Chapter 5 Advanced Reporting Working with the Media Security Log 3 Click Apply The Progress Window displays The Progress Window contains information on the action elapsed time and status of the requested operation e If Success appears in the Progress Window the operation completed successfully Click Close to close the Progress Window e If Failure appears in the Progress Window the operation did not successfully complete 4 To view the Media Security Log select Reports gt Log Viewer and then select Media Security Log Viewing Saving and E Using the Web client you can view save or e mail the Media Security mailing Media Security Log Log You can only access this report from the Web client Web Client 1 Select Reports gt Log Viewer 2 Select Media Security Log from the list of logs and click Next The report displays in a new window for viewing 3 You can save or e mail the report following the on screen instructions Note If you want to e mail the log file to a recipient type the recipient s name in the text box next to the E mail button and then click the E mail button You must have your e mail notification configured in order to e mail a log file See Configu
66. i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 10 Troubleshooting The Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 libraries include advanced system monitoring and alerting mechanisms that inform you of library status and issues The library provides you with status information about various library subsystems and components It also notifies you of issues it detects and guides you through diagnosing and correcting issues before problems interfere with backups This chapter covers e About Diagnostic Tickets e Capturing Snapshots of Library Information e Troubleshooting Library Not Ready Messages e Retrieving Tape Drive Logs e Interpreting LEDs e Running the Installation and Verification Test IVT e Running the IVT Diagnostic Subtests Individually Robotics Tape Drive and Magazine Tests e Running the Random Move Test e Performing Library Diagnostics e Resetting Factory Defaults Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 247 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting About Diagnostic Tickets About Diagnostic Tickets The library uses advanced problem detection reporting and notification technology to alert you of problems as soon as they occur The library performs numerous self tests to monitor the library s temperature voltage and currents and standard library operations It performs these self tests each time the library is powered on and during normal operation when the library is idle
67. i80 report on the Web client by selecting Reports gt About gt Scalar i40 i80 11 Save the library configuration again see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Updating and Autoleveling Tape Drive Firmware The library firmware bundle file contains baseline tape drive firmware image that Quantum has validated Tape drive firmware is installed at the same time as library firmware You can also install upgrades or patches separately which is described in the sections below In addition the library is equipped with a tape drive autoleveling feature that automatically updates firmware on all installed tape drives keeping all tape drives of the same type at the same firmware level About Tape Drive Autoleveling occurs only at specific times Firmware Autoleveling e Tape drive firmware is verified whenever a tape drive is added replaced or power cycled or when the library is rebooted If the firmware installed on the tape drive does not match the tape drive firmware installed on the library the tape drive firmware is autoleveled e Tape drive firmware is autoleveled when library firmware is updated see Updating Library Firmware on page 235 Details about Autoleveling include e The autoleveling feature is always enabled e The library firmware contains baseline tape drive firmware image that Quantum has validated You cannot delete any of the baseline 240 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User
68. into your Internet browser If you do not know your library s IP address you can find it on the operator panel by selecting Reports gt Network Settings At the login screen enter a user name and its associated password and click OK Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 137 Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Logging Out Logging in When LDAP When LDAP or Kerberos is enabled the Web client Login screen displays or Kerberos is Enabled a Remote Authentication check box Log in as follows e Select the Remote Authentication check box to log in using a directory service user name and password e Clear the Remote Authentication check box to log in using a local user name and password For more information on LDAP see Configuring LDAP on the Library on page 89 For more information on Kerberos see Configuring Kerberos on page 93 Logging Out Logging out secures the library from being accessed by unauthorized users Log out whenever you have finished accessing the library Note You will only be able to log out of the operator panel if passwords have been configured see Enabling and Creating Passwords on the Operator Panel on page 83 Note Clicking the close button X in the upper right corner of the Web client closes the browser window but does not log you out Note All users are logged out automatically after a configurable period of inactivity The default timeout
69. key request or the library is rebooted At that point the library starts over and uses server 1 for key requests In the text boxes type either e The IPv4 or IPv6 address of the key server if DNS is not enabled or e The host name of the key server if DNS is enabled Port In the Port text boxes type the port numbers corresponding to the listed servers The port number listed in the text box must match the port number on the server Note For SKM the port number is always 6000 You cannot change SKM port numbers For KMIP Key Manager the port number must match the configured port number on the KMIP key manager server A typical port number used for communication between the KMIP key manager server and the library is port 5696 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Step 5 Install TLS Communication Certificates on the Library Step 6 Run EKM Path Diagnostics Step 7 Configure Partitions for Library Managed Encryption Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Scalar Key Manager SKM on the Library 8 Click Apply 9 Ensure all ports corresponding to the EKM servers are open on your firewall to allow the library to connect to the servers For SKM ports 80 6000 and 6001 must be open Depending on when your library was manufactured TLS certificates may already be installed If they are not installed you must install them See Checking and Installing TLS Certificates on
70. library safely The robotic system identifies and moves the cartridges between the storage slots tape drives and the I E station The robotic arm picker has picker fingers that enable it to grab tape cartridges and move them into and out of slots and tape drives A barcode scanner is attached to the library s robotic hand This barcode scanner automatically identifies the slots and cartridges in the library if the cartridges are fitted with acceptable barcode labels Each tape cartridge must contain a unique matching readable barcode that the barcode scanner reads during the inventory process During the inventory process the barcode scanner reads the barcode labels on the tape cartridges and empty slots to identify the types of tape cartridges that are installed in the library Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 3 Chapter 1 Description Library Components Magazines Tape cartridges cannot have duplicate barcode labels This barcode identifies the cartridge The library stores the physical location of the tape cartridge in an inventory database All library or host requests typically reference the location of the tape cartridges based on this barcode number Barcode labels are mandatory and must adhere to specific standards For more information on barcodes see Chapter 11 Working With Cartridges and Barcodes Robots can only be replaced by a Quantum Support technician Magazines are removable and
71. location coordinates When AutoClean is enabled at least one cleaning slot has been configured you can export one or more cleaning cartridges from dedicated cleaning slots to the I E station for removal from the library You may need to export expired cleaning cartridges or free up cleaning slots for data storage After exporting cleaning cartridges you can reduce the number of configured cleaning slots The extra slots become available for use as storage slots For information on configuring cleaning slots see Configuring Cleaning Slots on page 59 For a description of AutoClean see About AutoClean on page 165 Note If your library has zero I E station slots you cannot import or export cleaning media See Configuring I E Station Slots on page 62 Caution Some host applications may fail import export operations when the I E station contains cartridges that are assigned to another partition Move cartridges from the I E station as soon as possible to avoid possible conflicts with the other partitions The number of cleaning cartridges you can export is limited to the number of empty I E station slots You can export cleaning cartridges from either the operator panel or the Web client Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Cleaning Tape Drives Operator Panel 1 Select Actions gt I E gt Export Cleaning Tape 2 Use the Up and Down button
72. logs unless Quantum Support directs you to do so You can download the logs to your computer or e mail them to a recipient In order to e mail the logs the library e mail account must be configured see Configuring the Library E Mail Account on page 75 The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows e From the Web client select Tools gt EKM Management gt Retrieve SKM Logs Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 209 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Performing Scalar Key Manager Functions Available on the Library Using the SKM Encryption Key Import Warning Log 210 This log lists the tape cartridges for which encryption keys failed the most recent encryption key import operation If you have only partial success when importing a file of encryption keys meaning some keys import successfully but some keys do not the library displays an import warning message and generates a diagnostic ticket that directs you to view this log to see which keys did not get imported For each key that failed the import the log provides a message type that is either e Error The key could not be imported e Warning The key was imported but the metadata update failed For each key that failed the import the log provides one of the following message descriptions e CRC Data Missing Error Metadata is missing for the key This means that the export file is corrupt Suggested Solution Export
73. mode from online to offline all host application commands in progress at the start of the mode change are completed You can change partition modes from the operator panel or the Web client Operator Panel 1 Select Actions gt Change Partition Mode The partitions are displayed along with their online offline status 2 If more than one partition is configured on the library use the Up and Down buttons to select a partition Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Configuring Cleaning Slots 3 Press Modify 4 Uses the Up and Down buttons to change the mode 5 Press Apply Web Client 1 Select Operations gt Partitions gt Change Mode In the partition table under Mode the Current column indicates the current mode of the partition The New column contains an Online Offline button The button toggles between modes Note If a partition is in use the Online Offline button is grayed out 2 Inthe partition table identify the partition that requires a mode change 3 Click the Online Offline button to toggle to the desired mode 4 Click Apply 5 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Configuring Cleaning Slots Cleaning slots are used exclusively to store cleaning cartridges Configuring one or more cleaning slots enables the library s AutoClean feature for all partitions in the library When AutoClean is enabled t
74. o drive remains in the drive sled in the library You may want to perform a reset if a tape drive does not come ready or it is not behaving properly for example if a tape is stuck in the drive and will not unload The reset may take several minutes After the reset operation completes the tape drive is rebooted and reconfigured This takes about 60 seconds Wait 60 seconds before performing further drive operations You may perform a tape drive reset from either the operator panel or the Web client If you use the Web client you must enter Diagnostics which logs out all users of the same or lower privilege level see Performing Library Diagnostics on page 267 Operator Panel 1 Select Actions gt Tape Drive gt Reset 2 If more than one tape drive is installed in the library select the tape drive you want to reset and press Reset or select ALL 3 Once the operation completes the operator panel displays a message stating that the operation completed and there will be diagnostic tickets if it failed 4 Press OK Check to see if the library generated diagnostic tickets 268 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Performing Library Diagnostics Web Client 1 Enter Diagnostics Tools gt Diagnostics then click OK to take partitions offline and log out all other users of the same or lower privileges 2 Select Drives gt Drive Tests gt Reset 3 If the tape drives are assi
75. one or more host applications Organizing the library into partitions divides the resources into virtual sections If one of the resources is not available due to a failure or other cause the other partitions and their assigned components are still available Partitions can also be used to control access to portions of the library by granting permissions to user accounts to access certain partitions see Privilege Levels on page 80 and Creating Local User Accounts on the Web Client on page 81 For more information on partitions see Working With Partitions on page 49 The control path tape drive is used to connect a partition to a host application Only one tape drive can be selected as the control path at one time By default the first tape drive assigned to a partition is designated as the control path In the event that the control path connection to the host application fails you can select a new control path for the partition See Configuring Control Paths on page 66 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 11 Chapter 1 Description Licensable Features Support for WORM Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 tape libraries support WORM write once read many technology WORM allows non rewriteable and non erasable data to be written and provides extra data security by prohibiting accidental data erasure The WORM feature is supported whenever you use WORM cartridges Licensable Features Capacity on Demand COD
76. partition to another You can only perform move commands from the Web client Web Client 1 Select Operations gt Media gt Move 2 If more than one partition exists select the partition that contains the cartridge you want to move and click Next The Move Media Partition Mode screen displays where Partitionis the name of the partition and Mode is the current mode of the partition 3 In the Select Media section select the source cartridge you want to move Note You can use the Filter by Barcode text box to filter the available cartridge barcodes Click the Help button next to the Find button for more information about filtering barcodes In addition if not all cartridges appear on the screen use the Page 1 of x arrows to view the additional cartridges Note Bold column headings in the table can be sorted For example selecting the Location column heading will sort by location coordinates 4 Inthe Select Destination section select a destination location for the source cartridge Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 157 Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Performing Media Operations Exporting Tape Cartridges 158 5 Click Apply 6 Click OK to confirm it is OK to take the partition offline The robot moves the cartridge to the destination A success message displays when the move completes The Export Media operation enables you to export data cartridges from
77. partitions You can create partitions automatically on either the operator panel or the Web client For more information see Automatically Creating Partitions on page 51 e Manually An administrator can create partitions one at a time Creating partitions manually gives you more control over resource allocation When you manually create partitions you add to the number of existing partitions You can only create partitions manually on the Web client For more information see Manually Creating Partitions on page 52 You can modify a partition if you need to change its settings For example the partition name emulation type media barcode format to report to host and number of assigned tape drives and slots can be modified For information on modifying partitions see Modifying Partitions on page 55 When a partition is no longer needed it can be deleted For information on deleting partitions see Deleting Partitions on page 55 Administrators can create delete and control access to all library partitions Users can be given access to only certain partitions and denied access to others For information on changing partition access for users see Changing Access to Partitions on page 57 Details on partitions include e A partition consists of one tape drive and one slot at a minimum The tape drive or slot cannot be shared with another partition e The default configuration for the library is one partition per un
78. power supply works in either the Scalar i40 or the Scalar i80 Warning The power outlet must be available near the library and must be easily accessible The power system consists of the following components e Power supply e AC power cord The power supply has one status LED For more information see Power Supply LED on page 261 For information on removing and replacing power supplies see 6 66559 XX Scalar 140 and Scalar 180 Power Supply Replacement The system control board SCB contains the library firmware all configurable settings license keys and SKM TLS certificates It manages the entire library including the operator panel and robot and is responsible for running system tests to ensure that the library is functioning properly The SCB has two Ethernet ports e Left port For remote management Web client e Right port For service only In rare cases you may need to change the IP address of the port if it conflicts with your library IP address see Configuring the Service Port on page 78 See Figure 4 on page 10 and Figure 5 on page 10 for port locations Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 1 Description Library Components The SCB contains one LED in addition to two LEDs on each Ethernet port for a total of 5 LEDs For more information see System Control Board LEDs on page 259 For information on removing and replacing the SCB see 6 66556 XX Scalar 140 and S
79. procedure for each e mail address Before you can e mail the configuration record the library e mail account must be configured For information on setting up the e mail account see Configuring the Library E Mail Account on page 75 You can only e mail the library configuration record from the Web client Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 223 Chapter 8 Getting Information About the Library Viewing the Network Settings Report Web Client 1 Select Tools gt E mail Configuration Record 2 Type an e mail address into the E mail Address text box 3 Click Apply Viewing the Network Settings Report The Network Settings report provides information on the following library settings Network Host name primary DNS and alternate DNS IPv4 Settings DHCP enabled disabled IP address gateway and netmask IPv6 Settings if IPv6 is enabled DHCP enabled disabled stateless configuration enabled disabled static configuration enabled disabled net prefix gateway and all IPv6 addresses SSL SSL port and cipher SMI S Access enabled disabled and state enabled disabled SNMP Enabled disabled status for Access V1 V2 V3 and encryption algorithm and port SNMP Traps IP addresses and ports Web Client Select Reports gt Network Settings Viewing the Logged in Users Report The Logged In Users report contains information about the users that are currently logged
80. run the full IVT upon installation of a new library and at any other time you remove replace or service components that require you to move the library into or out of a rack or desktop kit You must run the robotics test after a Y tray replacement Note Y tray with Robot replacement is a service only procedure If the Y tray fails you will need to call Quantum Support for a replacement The full IVT consists of three subtests You may run the subtests separately see Performing Library Diagnostics on page 267 The full IVT takes up to 30 minutes to complete e Robotics Test A series of tests that evaluates the basic functionality of the robotics assembly including picker travel Y carriage assembly travel barcode scanning calibration sensors 262 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Running the Installation and Verification Test IVT and several moves of a scratch tape It also calibrates the robot to the library The test takes up to 11 minutes to complete Tape Drive Test For each installed tape drive the robot moves a scratch tape into the tape drive inventories the scratch tape and moves the scratch tape out of the tape drive The test takes 1 2 minutes per tape drive Magazine Test Moves a scratch tape through all storage slots in the library These tests verify the robotics can reach all the slots in the magazine for both get and put operations The test ta
81. setting is disabled by default Caution If you change the logical serial number addressing setting you must power cycle the library perform a shutdown and press the power button or remove and replace each tape drive in the library in order for the change to take effect Operator Panel 1 Select Setup gt System Settings gt Logical SN Addr 2 Press Modify 3 Use the Up and Down buttons to select Enabled or Disabled and press Apply 4 Make another selection or press Exit 5 Power cycle the library 6 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Manual Cartridge Assignment Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Configuring System Settings Administrators can disable or enable default setting manual cartridge assignment When manual cartridge assignment is enabled the I E Assign screen automatically displays on the operator panel once cartridges are placed into the I E station The I E Assign screen prompts you to assign the cartridges to a specific partition The cartridges can then be used only by the assigned partition When manual cartridge assignment is disabled the I E Assign screen does not display on the operator panel and the cartridges in the I E station are visible to all partitions as well as the System partition and can be used by any partition The manual cartridge setting is enabled by default You can o
82. steps Figure 32 Configuring Pa rtiti on E ncrypti on Setup Encryption Partition Configuration Set up Library Managed Encryption LME for library partitions Partition EKM Type LME Key Reuse library_a m library_b l Click here to run EKM Path Diagnostics Apiye 2 If you want to change the encryption method for a partition make sure that no tape drives in that partition have cartridges loaded in them If tape drives have cartridges loaded you cannot change the encryption method 3 Select the encryption method for each partition To enable Library Managed Encryption for a partition ensure the LME check box is selected See Table 7 on page 185 for a description of the encryption methods The encryption method applies to all encryption capable tape drives and media in that partition Note When you change the encryption method on a partition the partition is taken offline When the change completes the partition comes back online automatically 184 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Scalar Key Manager SKM on the Library Table 7 Encryption Methods p Encryption Method Description Library Managed Encryption LME enabled For use with EKM Enables encryption support via a connected EKM key server for all encryption capable tape drives and media assigned to the partition Library Managed Encryption disabled Not for
83. storage column e The D designates the tape drive column e The triangle represents the robot If it is filled in then the robot contains the media otherwise the robot is empty The direction the triangle points to indicates its location The right information section provides the following 218 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 8 Getting Information About the Library Viewing the Location of the Robot e Describes the current or last operation performed If the operation performed affects a device location the description will be numeric for example Move Media 1 2 5 to 1 5 1 If the operation affects a slot location such as unlocking a magazine the description will be textual for example Unlock Left Magazine e Provides the status of the operation Active Completed or Failed 2 For additional information about the status select Details Last Operation FAILED Move 0 8 4 to 0 4 3 Robot At 0 3 3 0 4 4 Picker Extended Picker Fingers Released exit A do EEEE B This screen provides details for the library status e Last Operation Status of last completed operation Succeeded or Failed e Robot The Robot location refers to where the robot was at the end of the operation For example if the robot is between two slots it will display the robot location as Robot At 0 1 4 0 1 5 If it is directly in front of a slot it would then read for exam
84. supplies There are two LEDs on the front panel above the power button They function as follows LED Location Color Indicates Power on LED Green Library power is ON closest to power button Ticket indicator Amber The LED is illuminated when at least LED farthest from one open or unopened diagnostic power button ticket exists Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 257 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Interpreting LEDs Figure 47 Front Panel LEDs op indicator LED el Power on LED 258 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide System Control Board LEDs Figure 48 System Control Board LEDs Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Interpreting LEDs The SCB has one health status LED In addition each Ethernet port contains two LEDs a green activity indicator and an amber link indicator The Ethernet port closest to the center of the library is for customer use The Ethernet port farthest from the center of the library is for service use only LED Color Indicates SCB Health Green Healthy and operational Status LED 3 Red Failure Replacement required Ethernet Green This LED illuminates when actual Port Green traffic is being sent over the Ethernet LED Activity cable The LED may be blinking or on Indicator solid it blinks more rapidly the more traffic is being sent over the connection When the LED is lit communications are in process and when
85. tape 34 9 Ibs 15 8kg 52 4 Ibs 23 8 kg drives and no tape cartridges installed Weight one power supply two tape With 2 half height SAS tape With 2 full height SAS tape drives and no tape cartridges installed drives 44 2 Ibs 20 kg drives 65 7 Ibs 29 8 kg Depths listed above exclude drive sleds Drive sleds will add up to 50 mm to the overall length of the library depending on tape drive type half height Fibre Channel SAS Additionally when planning space requirements take into account installed cables particularly fibre optic cable radius on Fibre Channel tape drives Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 277 Appendix A Specifications Capacity a Table 9 Library Installed in Desktop Kit Scalar i40 Scalar i80 Height with desktop feet insta Iled 5 3 in 135 6 mm 10 6 in 268 8 mm Width 18 9 in 480 mm 18 9 in 480 mm Depth from library front bezel to back of library excludes drive sleds 31 2 in 793 mm 31 2 in 793 mm Depths listed above exclude drive sleds Drive sleds will add up to 50 mm to the overall length of the library depending on tape drive type half height Fibre Channel SAS Additionally when planning space requirements take into account installed cables particularly fibre optic cable radius on Fibre Cha nnel tape drives Capacity Scalar i40 Scalar i80 Form Facto
86. that partition and can only be used by that partition Caution Some host applications may fail import export operations when the I E station contains cartridges that are assigned to another partition Move cartridges from the I E station as soon as possible to avoid possible conflicts with the other partitions The process for importing cartridges includes the following steps Inserting and Assigning Cartridges 1 Verify that all tape drives are unloaded and that all cartridges are in their appropriate storage slot locations Doing this will avoid over loading the library with cartridges 2 Go to the front of the library and insert cartridges into the I E station Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 153 Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Performing Media Operations 3 Close the IE station The I E Assign screen displays on the operator panel if Manual Cartridge Assignment is enabled on the operator panel Setup gt System Settings 4 Ifthe I E Assign screen displays do the following a Using the operator panel select the partition to which you want to assign the cartridges All unassigned cartridges in the I E station will be assigned to the same partition b Press Apply Alternatively you may press Cancel to bypass this step if you wish to assign cartridges to different partitions using the Web client Note that you must disable manual cartridge assignment from the operator panel
87. that no login is required to access the operator panel You can re create the passwords again as needed You can only reset operator panel passwords via the Web client Web Client 1 Select Setup gt User Management gt Reset Operator Panel Passwords 2 Click Apply Working With LDAP User Accounts Remote Authentication Local Authentication vs Local authentication control is managed on the library An administrator Remote Authentication sets up accounts and privileges on the library To use local authentication a user must enter a local user name and password Remote authentication is managed by a Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP server Enabling LDAP allows existing user accounts residing on an LDAP server to be integrated into the library s current user account management subsystem User account information is centralized and shared by different applications simplifying user account management tasks To use remote authentication you must enable LDAP on the library Once LDAP is enabled users can log into the library using either LDAP or local authentication To use LDAP authentication a user must enter a directory service user name and password The Web client Login screen displays the Remote Authentication login option only when LDAP is enabled See Logging in When LDAP or Kerberos is Enabled on page 138 LDAP logins are only available on the library Web client Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i
88. the library type Scalar i40 or Scalar i80 e On active pages the field displays the name of the main menu Setup Actions Tools Reports e When a message displays the field displays the message type Success Completed Information FAILURE NOTICE Failure messages will blink Functions Operator Panel Element Title bar Name 22 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 3 Understanding the User Interface Operator Panel Operator Panel Element Description Status The status field displays the current state or operation being performed by the robot If the robot is not idle the status will blink Status can be any of the following e Initializing The library is currently in the process of initializing e Autoleveling The robotics hardware is being autoleveled e Homing The robot is performing a home operation e Teaching The robot is performing a teach operation e Calibrating The robot is performing a calibration operation e Scanning The robot is performing an inventory operation e Unlocking The robot is in the process of unlocking a magazine e Move Media The robot is moving media from one location to another e Loading The robot is in the process of moving a tape to load into a tape drive e Unloading The robot is in the process of unloading a tape drive and returning it to the source location e Idle The robot is ready and idle
89. the Client Certificate File c In the Client Certificate Password field type the password used when generating the certificate files 6 Click Apply to import the files onto the library 7 Verify that the TLS certificates are now installed in the library At the bottom of the page is a statement indicating whether the certificates are currently installed In addition the table at the bottom of the screen should be filled in with the correct information Performing Scalar Key Manager Functions Available on the Library Once the SKM servers are set up most SKM functions occur automatically without user action required SKM provides some key management capability through the library Web client For a complete description and instructions for using these features see the library Web client online help or the Scalar Key Manager User s Guide 196 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Performing Scalar Key Manager Functions Available on the Library These functions are Generating Data Encryption Keys Sharing Encrypted Tape Cartridges Exporting Encryption Certificates Importing Encryption Certificates Exporting Data Encryption Keys Importing Data Encryption Keys Accessing the SKM Server Logs Using the SKM Encryption Key Import Warning Log Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 197 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Performing Sc
90. the LED is off no communication is occurring Ethernet Amber This LED illuminates solidly when a Port Amber link is established and will be off LED Link when no link is present Link Indicator means an Ethernet cable is connected and the other end of the cable is also connected to another powered up and operational Ethernet device Customer Ethernet port LEDs Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Service Ethernet port LEDs Health status LED 259 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Interpreting LEDs Tape Drive Sled LEDs The library supports SAS and Fibre Channel tape drives The drive sled SAS LEDs for each are described below SAS Tape Drive Sleds have one LED that indicates the following Color Indicates Green Healthy and operational Amber Tape drive is offline Red Failure Replacement required Fibre Channel Fibre Channel tape drive sleds have two LEDs on their rear panel indicated on the drive sled as STATUS and LINK see Figure 49 LED Color Indicates Status Green Healthy and operational Amber Tape drive is offline Red Failure Replacement required Link Green On solid Fibre Channel link is present Flashing Fibre Channel link is present and communications are in process Off No Fibre Channel link is currently present 260 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Figure 49
91. the Library Configuration on page 106 Administrators can delete other local administrator and user accounts when they are no longer needed Note You cannot delete the default administrator account Web Client 1 Select Setup gt User Management gt User Accounts The Setup Users screen displays 2 Select a user account and click Delete A confirmation dialog box displays Click OK 4 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 If you do not set passwords on the operator panel all users will have access to all functions including administrator and service functions If you want to restrict access to some users you must set passwords on the operator panel Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 83 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Working With Local User Accounts and Passwords 84 Passwords on the operator panel are disabled by default Once you enable and configure passwords on the operator panel all users must enter a password on the operator panel to log in In addition the service login is automatically enabled and users with user or admin privileges cannot access service functions The service password is only available to Quantum Support personnel Passwords on the operator panel are completely different and separate from passwords on the Web client On the Web client you can create and set up to 18 unique user accounts with different user names
92. the Web client until the browser refreshes Retrieving Tape Drive Logs The library allows you to retrieve tape drive logs using the Web client Tape drive log information can be used to help troubleshoot the library the tape drive sled and tape drive issues Since the log retrieval process can take up to 30 minutes the tape drive and associated partition are automatically taken offline during the operation and brought back online when the operation completes You will be asked to confirm that you want to take the tape drive and partition offline Tape drive log files adhere to the following naming convention UDS_ID_SN DMP where ID identifies the tape drive coordinate location within the library and SN identifies the tape drive serial number You can only retrieve tape drive logs via the Web client Web Client 1 Select Tools gt Drive Operations 2 Select Retrieve Tape Drive Log 3 Click Apply 4 When the Success message displays complete the next screens to save the log file to your computer 256 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Interpreting LEDs Interpreting LEDs Front Panel LEDs LEDs provide a visual indication about the status of certain library components LEDs can sometimes communicate that a problem exists when diagnostic tickets cannot The following components of the library have LEDs e Front panel e System control board SCB e Tape drives e Power
93. the key s for the listed tape cartridge s again and then perform the import operation again e CRC Check Failed Error The CRC data does not match the key or key metadata The export file is corrupt Suggested solution Try to import the same file again If this fails export the key s for the listed tape cartridge s again and then perform the import operation again e Import To Primary Secondary Server Failed Error The key import to the stated server failed probably due to a network or other connection issue If the key failed to import to the secondary server it may have been imported successfully to the primary server Suggested solution Check network connections and perform the import operation again e Key Metadata Update Failed but key data was imported successfully Warning The key was imported but the metadata update failed You can access the key but you cannot export it until it is actually used in an encryption operation on the library Suggested solution Use the key to read decrypt a tape This marks the key as used and updates the metadata which will allow you to export the key This log is only available if you are running SKM and have encryption key management licensed on the library see Adding or Upgrading Licensable Features on page 68 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Performing Scalar Key Manager Functions Available on the
94. tickets only on the Web client You can view and close diagnostic tickets on both the operator panel and the Web client but only the Web client provides a complete description of the event and guides you through a series of steps to resolve the issue It is recommended that you use the Web client to view and resolve all your diagnostic tickets You can close all tickets at once but this is not recommended It is recommended that each diagnostic ticket be viewed analyzed and closed individually Only one person at a time can resolve a ticket Multiple users can however view ticket details simultaneously If your Web client session goes down while resolving a diagnostic ticket you must wait 3 minutes before you can continue resolving the diagnostic ticket Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 249 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting About Diagnostic Tickets 250 If you do not close a diagnostic ticket and the issue recurs the only thing that gets updated in the ticket is the date and time the issue recurred listed under Last Occurrence on the Web client and Updated on the operator panel Ticket details are not updated because the original issue is often the root cause If the location of the error in the library changed since the ticket was first issued the ticket details will continue to reflect the original error location Note A diagnostic ticket can have a status of Cancelled As discussed below in Closing Diagn
95. to move it into another empty slot in the partition If no empty slots exist the unload operation will fail If this happens you can try to perform a move operation to move the cartridge from the tape drive to an I E station instead see Moving Tape Cartridges on page 156 or free up a storage slot and try the unload operation again Cleaning Tape Drives Tape drives require occasional cleaning Cleaning cartridges are used to remove accumulated residue from each tape drive s read write head Cleaning slots are used exclusively to store cleaning cartridges Configuring one or more cleaning slots enables the library s AutoClean feature for all partitions in the library When AutoClean is enabled the library is notified by a tape drive when cleaning is required and the library automatically cleans the tape drive using a cartridge in a cleaning slot For more information about the AutoClean feature see About AutoClean on page 165 You can configure cleaning slots during the initial library configuration or at any time in the future as long as there are licensed slots available in the library For instructions on how to configure cleaning slots see Configuring Cleaning Slots on page 59 A maximum of four cleaning slots can be configured Zero cleaning slots are configured by default Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 163 Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Cleaning Tape Drives Valid Cleaning Cartridges
96. update process starts you must wait until it completes Do not attempt to interrupt the process in any way and do not power cycle the library Loss of data or library operability could occur Note If you downgrade library firmware to an earlier version using the firmware upgrade process library configuration settings will be reset to the factory defaults see Resetting Factory Defaults on page 270 You must manually reconfigure your library s settings You can also downgrade library firmware by restoring a configuration file that contains the version of firmware to which you want to downgrade see Restoring the Library Configuration on page 107 After downgrading network settings are not reset and licenses remain as long as the downgraded firmware version supports that licensed feature You can only update firmware from the Web client Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 9 Updating Firmware Updating Library Firmware Web Client Caution You must upgrade your library firmware to version i6 0 160G before it can be upgraded to any later firmware 1 Log into your library to view the latest firmware version available Click Tools gt Update Library Firmware The screen displays the firmware currently loaded on your library and the latest available firmware Figure 46 Tools Update Library Firmware Screen Tools Update Library Firmware Update your library firmwa
97. use with EKM Allows an external backup application to provide encryption support to all encryption capable tape drives and media within the partition The library will NOT communicate with the EKM key server on this partition This is the default setting if you have encryption capable tape drives in the partition This option should remain selected unless you are connecting the library to an external EKM key server Note If you want an external application to manage encryption you must specifically configure the application to do so The library will not participate in performing this type of encryption Unsupported Means that one or more tape drives in the partition do not support encryption If Unsupported is shown it will be greyed out and you will not be able to change the setting 4 Ifyou want to enable Key Reuse for a partition select the Key Reuse check box See About Key Reuse on page 178 5 Click Apply SKM When you set the Encryption Method to LME enabled on a partition for the first time the library automatically triggers each SKM server to generate a set of unique data encryption keys This may take 15 minutes to an hour or longer depending on network performance The library notifies you when the process is complete Wait for the process to complete before resuming library operations Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 185 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management EKM Path Di
98. your host application documentation for more information Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Performing Media Operations Note Note on importing unassigned tape cartridges When the manual cartridge assignment setting is enabled the default setting the I E Assign screen automatically displays on the operator panel after you have loaded the cartridges into the I E station and closed the I E station The screen prompts you to assign the cartridges to a specific partition or to the System partition The cartridges can then be used only by the assigned partition If you do not wish to assign cartridges to a partition immediately or you wish to assign them to different partitions via the Web client you can cancel out of this screen and the cartridges are considered unassigned Alternatively you can disable manual cartridge assignment operator panel Setup gt System Settings gt Man Cart Assign see Manual Cartridge Assignment on page 99 In this case the I E Assign screen does not appear on the operator panel and the cartridges are considered unassigned Unassigned cartridges in the I E station are available for use by any partition including the System partition However you can only import or move unassigned cartridges into the library when manual cartridge assignment is disabled Once imported or moved into a partition the cartridges are considered assigned to
99. 0 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 5 Advanced Reporting Using Advanced Reporting Reports The Media Integrity Analysis report collects the following information for each TapeAlert e Date Time e Tape drive physical serial number e Cartridge barcode e TapeAlert value e TapeAlert Description You can only access this report from the Web client Web Client 1 From the library menu bar select Reports gt Advanced Reporting gt Media Integrity Analysis The Media Integrity Analysis Report configuration page opens This may take several minutes 2 Configure the report by specifying the following e Date Range Specifies the range of time covered by the report Choose Last 7 days Last 4 weeks default Last 3 months or All History as far back as there is data in the log file e Attributes Specifies which values are included in the report and how they are combined Select in any combination including all default and none If you select no attributes the chart displays the TapeAlert count for the selected Grouping e Cartridge Barcode All relevant tape cartridges e Drive Physical SN All relevant tape drives e TapeAlert The TapeAlert flags that were issued For a description of all TapeAlert flags see Appendix B Tape Alert Flag Descriptions e Chart How the data is displayed in the chart Choose Area Bar default Line or Pie Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guid
100. 000 104 Remote Service Login 0 0c 104 SNMP VIV i eeu eeeeee Sede ve bas Uwe ween PER EEE 104 SSL ogee eeedh eRe boc ieieee ni vieestad Miaddanaadens 105 Saving and Restoring the Library Configuration 106 Saving the Library Configuration 000 106 Restoring the Library Configuration 107 Registering the Library 0 0 00 108 Changing Operator Panel Home Screen View 2 045 108 Changing to Alternate Home Screen 204 108 Returning to Default Home Screen 2 0000 109 Chapter 5 Advanced Reporting 111 Advanced Reporting Features 000 0 cece eee 112 Required Firmware 0 000 cece eee eee 113 vi Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Contents Working with Control Path Failover CPF 00000 ee 113 Prerequisites 0 0 0 eee 113 Configuring CPF sss csseee cree Fecave be eye ewes eee e 114 F reg CPF ixecceeneieiiddegees ere ena dad ed nae ns 115 Using Advanced Reporting Reports 0000e caer eee 117 Configuring the Drive Resource Utilization Report 118 Configuring the Media Integrity Analysis Report 120 Using Advanced Reporting Templates 123 Loading and Reloading Advanced Reporting Data 124 Deleting Advanced Reporting Data 125 Saving and E mailing Advanced Reporting Data Files 125 Working with the Media Security Log
101. 000e0 eee eee 209 Using the SKM Encryption Key Import Warning Log 210 Viewing Audit Logs 0 0 00 e eee eee 211 Performing KMIP Key Manager Functions on the Library 213 Viewing and Changing the Active Key Server 213 Chapter 8 Getting Information About the Library 215 Viewing Library Information 0 0 0000 eee eee 216 Viewing System Information 0 000 00 cee ee 216 Viewing the Location of the Robot 0000 eae 217 Viewing the Library Configuration Report 044 220 Saving and E mailing the Library Configuration Record 222 Saving the Configuration Record 00000 223 E mailing the Configuration Record 223 Viewing the Network Settings Report 00000000 224 Viewing the Logged in Users Report 020000 2c eae 224 Viewing the All Slots Report 000000 eee 225 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide ix Contents Viewing Saving and E mailing Library Logs 226 Cleaning Log 0 ae 227 Diagnostic Tickets Log 00 cece eee eee 227 Media Security Log with Advanced Reporting License 228 Media Usage Log with Advanced Reporting License 228 SKM Encryption Key Import Warning Log with EKM Licensee a ctr aa eee een ae arn es ie oe EE 229 Tape Drive Log 0 0 ee 229 Viewing Library Information on the Operator Panel 23
102. 1 Viewing Partition Information 000005 231 Viewing Tape Drive Information 005 231 Viewing Network Settings 000000 2c eee eee 232 Viewing the Date Time and Time Zone 232 Viewing Licenses 1 2 0 ee 232 Using Advanced Reporting Features 0 00 eens 233 Viewing the Open Source License Agreement 44 233 Viewing the Copyright Statement 02 0002 eee eee 233 Chapter 9 Updating Firmware 235 Updating Library Firmware 00 000 ccc ee ee 235 Updating and Autoleveling Tape Drive Firmware 240 About Tape Drive Firmware Autoleveling 240 Uploading Tape Drive Firmware Used in Autoleveling 242 Deleting Tape Drive Firmware Used in Autoleveling 244 Initiating Tape Drive Firmware Autoleveling 245 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting 247 About Diagnostic Tickets 0 0 0 000 cee ee 248 Viewing Closing and Resolving Diagnostic Tickets 249 Closing Diagnostic Tickets Automatically 252 Capturing Snapshots of Library Information 253 Troubleshooting Library Not Ready Messages 254 Not Ready Messages on the Operator Panel 254 Not Ready Messages on the Web Client 254 Retrieving Tape Drive Logs 000 cece ee ee 256 x Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Contents I
103. 3 Tape system C The tape system area could not be read Read errors while area read successfully at load time reading the system failure 1 Copy data to another tape cartridge area on load 54 No start of data C The start of data could not be found on Tape damaged bulk the tape erased or incorrect 1 Check that you are using the correct format format tape 2 Discard the tape or return the tape to your supplier 55 Loading or C The operation has failed because the The drive is unable to threading media cannot be loaded and threaded load the media and failure 1 Remove the cartridge inspect it as thread the tape specified in the product manual and retry the operation 2 If the problem persists call the tape drive supplier help line 56 Unrecoverable C The operation has failed because the The drive is unable to unload failure medium cannot be unloaded unload the medium 1 Do not attempt to extract the tape cartridge 2 Call the tape driver supplier help line 292 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Appendix B Tape Alert Flag Descriptions Recommended Application Client No Flag Severity Message Probable Cause 57 Automation C The tape drive has a problem with the The drive has interface failure automation interface identified an interface 1 Check the power to the automation fault system 2 Check the cables and cable connections 3 Call the supplier help line if problem pers
104. 3 Wait until the robot unlocks the I E station and the screen displays the I E Station is Unlocked message see Figure 26 Figure 26 I E Station Unlocked Message I E Station 15 Unlocked waiting tor to be 146 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Unlocking and Opening the I E Station 4 Within 30 seconds open the I E station by pulling outward on the magazine bezel handle until the magazine stops moving If you do not open the magazine within 30 seconds it locks and you receive the following failure message nel I E Station Locked FAILURE T TER VE Station Unlock Timer The VE Station was NOT removed The I E Station has been locked 5 When finished push the magazine in completely The I E station is now locked Web Client 1 Select Operations gt I E Station Unlock 2 Select an I E station to unlock and click Apply Note Only closed I E stations are listed 3 Click Apply to confirm and click OK The Progress Window displays The Progress Window contains information on the action elapsed time and status of the requested operation Do one of the following e If Success appears in the Progress Window the I E station was unlocked Click Close to close the Progress Window The operator panel displays the status Unlocking and then Idle e If Failure appears in the Progress Window the I E station did not unlock 4 Within 30 seconds pu
105. 3 lists the Web client menus Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 31 Chapter 3 Understanding the User Interface Menu Trees Figure 12 Operator Panel Menus 32 Operator Panel Main Menu Bar single Actions VE Unlock I E Station Import Tape Import Cleaning Tape Export Tape Export Cleaning Tape Magazine Release Tape Drive Change Mode Unload Manual Cleaning Reset Change Partition Mode Shutdown Shutdown Library Restart Library ool iil Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Reports Diagnostic Tickets hot Library Tape Drives Close ALL About Library Partitions Tape Drives Network Settings Date Time Licenses Copyright Statement ACCESS KEY NOTE If passwords are not enabled on the operator panel all users have access to all menus and functions Only Available if LUI Passwords are enabled Figure 13 Web Client Menus Chapter 3 Understanding the User Interface Web Client Main Menu Bar iui ili Operations Media Move Import Export Cleaning Media Import Export Partitions Change Mode Drive Load Unload Change Mode Log Out ee Ue ales ee ee 2 E O O o o m
106. 33 all slots report 225 authentication traps 44 authorization code 68 AutoClean 165 autoleveling 240 automatic EKM path diagnostics 188 back button browser 26 barcode label requirements 273 labels installing 275 scanner 3 supported formats 53 274 browser back button 26 browsers supported 283 bulk loading cartridges 155 buttons back browser 26 navigation 3 navigation selection 24 operator panel 25 power 3 C canceling an operation 25 Capacity on Demand 12 cartridges see tape cartridges 272 certificates see encryption certificates cleaning cartridges exporting 168 importing 166 valid 164 cleaning log 227 cleaning slots configuring 59 cleaning tape drives 163 automatic 165 manually 170 COD see Capacity on Demand 12 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Index community string 45 configuration default 38 record 222 report 220 restoring 107 saving 106 contact information customer 77 Quantum xxv control path 66 copyright 233 customer contact information 77 D data encryption keys depletion of 200 exporting 204 206 generating 199 202 at initial setup 199 manually 201 when 100 depleted 200 when 80 depleted 199 importing 204 208 date setting 47 307 Index daylight saving time setting 49 default administrator account 79 default configuration 38 default gateway 41 default password 80 136 default user name 80 136 defaults resetting factory 270
107. 4 remote authentication 87 remote service login 104 removing power 139 144 reports about 216 advanced reporting 233 all slots 225 date time 232 library configuration 220 licenses 232 logged in users 224 network settings 224 232 operator panel 231 partition 231 310 system information 216 tape drives 231 resetting factory defaults 270 resetting tape drive 268 restart 139 142 restoring the library configuration 107 restraint robot 17 robot 3 get put test 269 releasing 17 restraint 17 test 264 running out of keys 200 S saving the library configuration 106 scanner barcode 3 SCB see system control board 8 scrolling fast 25 secure socket layer enabling disabling 105 security settings 102 service port 78 session timeout 96 setup wizard 37 sharing encrypted tapes 203 shut down 139 140 SKM configuring 179 encryption key import warning log 210 229 logs 209 210 229 server configuration 180 server log 209 TLS certificates 183 slots location coordinates 5 SMI S enabling disabling 100 SNMP authentication traps 44 community string 45 configuring 42 enabling disabling 100 MIB downloading 45 versions 44 specifications 277 SSH services enabling disabling 103 SSL enabling disabling 105 subnet mask 41 subsystem status 30 system control board description 8 system information report 216 system settings 97 system summary 30 T Tape Alerts 285 tape cartridges b
108. 7 days Last 4 weeks default Last 3 months or All History as far back as there is data in the log file e Attribute Specifies which value is included in the report Select one of the following e Data Written Read default The amount of data written to and read from each tape drive shown separately in the chart Total Read and Write The combined total amount of data written to and read from each tape drive e Media Mount Count The number of tape cartridge mounts e Media Mount Time The total amount of time media spent in the selected drive s e Media Motion Time The total amount of time media spent in motion while in the tape drive writing reading rewinding etc e Chart How the data is displayed in the chart Choose Area Bar default Line or Pie e Type The chart type Select one of the following e Rollup default Displays the Grouping on the x axis and the Attribute amount on the y axis e Trend Shows how the Attribute amount changes over time for the selected Grouping Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 119 Chapter 5 Advanced Reporting Using Advanced Reporting Reports e Grouping Specifies which tape drive s or partition s to include in the report Select one of the following e All Drives by Coordinate default Presents the sum total of the selected attribute for all tape drives according to their location in the library If mor
109. 80 User s Guide 87 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Working With LDAP User Accounts Remote Authentication LDAP Server Guidelines The following groups must be created on the LDAP server to enable _ remote login on the library e Library User Group Assign users to this group who need user privilege access to the library Enter the name of this group in the Library User Group field on the Setup Remote Authentication screen on the library Web client see Configuring LDAP on the Library on page 89 e Partition Groups For LDAP users with user privileges access to library partitions is determined by group assignment on the LDAP server Groups must be created on the LDAP server with names that match the library partitions names names must match but are not case sensitive Users with user privileges must be assigned to these groups on the LDAP server to have access to the corresponding partitions on the library e Library Admin Group Assign users to this group who need administrator privilege access to the library LDAP users with administrator privileges have access to all partitions and administrator functions and do not need to be assigned to partition related groups on the LDAP server Enter the name of this group in the Library Admin Group field on the Setup Remote Authentication screen on the library Web client see Configuring LDAP on the Library on page 89 You will need to have at least one user assigne
110. Additionally if you are using one of these Secure LDAP methods listed above you can also Install a TLS CA certificate for additional verification that the LDAP server has not been compromised The certificate must be the same certificate that is installed on your LDAP server and must be in pem format The library will only perform the verification if you have configured Secure LDAP using either LDAPS or StartTLS Place a copy of the certificate file in an accessible location on your computer and use the Browse button to locate and install it Once a certificate is installed you can remove it by checking the Remove TLS CA Certificate check box This check box only becomes available once a certificate is installed The presence of this check box lets you know that a certificate is installed Refer to Figure 14 LDAP Setup Example on page 92 Administrators can enable and configure Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP LDAP is the industry standard Internet protocol that provides centralized user account management Administrators can add delete and modify only local user account information The library Web client does not allow you to create modify or delete user account information on an LDAP server This must be done by the directory service provider For more information on working with local user accounts see Working With Local User Accounts and Passwords on page 79 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 89
111. Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management EKM Path Diagnostics Failure Scenarios If any of the tests fail try the following resolutions and run the test _ again to make sure it passes e Ping Test Failure Verify that the key server host is running and accessible from the network to which the library is connected e Path Test Failure Verify that the key server is actually running and that the IP address configured on the library is correct Check to see if there is a network configuration issue such as a firewall preventing communication with the server e Config Test Failure A database inconsistency has been detected Contact Quantum Support Running Manual EKM 1 Access the EKM Path Diagnostics screen in one of two ways Path Diagnostics e Select Setup gt Encryption gt System Configuration or Setup gt Encryption gt Partition Configuration and click the link that says Click here to run EKM Path Diagnostics e Enter library Diagnostics from the Web client select Tools gt Diagnostics and then select EKM gt EKM Path Diagnostics Note that entering Diagnostics will log off all other users of the same or lower privileges and take your partitions offline When you exit Diagnostics the partitions automatically come back online See Performing Library Diagnostics on page 267 for more information 2 Click Apply 3 The library performs the diagnostics and displays pass fail results on each of the tes
112. Fibre Channel Tape Drive LEDs Half height FC tape drive Half height LTO 6 FC tape drive Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Interpreting LEDs Link LED Status LED Link LED Status LED Power Supply LED Diagnostic tickets typically report all problems related to power supplies You can also observe the power supply LED to see if the power supply is functioning appropriately see Figure 50 The power supply LED indicates the following LED Color Indicates Green AC power is present and the library front panel power switch is turned ON Amber AC power is present but the library front panel switch is turned OFF Red Power supply failure Off No power Ensure the power supply is correctly plugged into a wall outlet Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 261 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Running the Installation and Verification Test IVT Figure 50 Power Supply LED Power supply LED Running the Installation and Verification Test IVT The Installation and Verification Test IVT is used to evaluate a newly installed library or one that has been moved The test calibrates the robot to the library verifies that the robot is functioning properly and verifies that the magazines and tape drives are installed correctly and reachable by the robot The test also verifies that barcode labels can be read by the robot scanning operation You should
113. For an example see Figure 14 on page 92 Password The password for the principal authorization login ID Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Working With LDAP User Accounts Remote Authentication e User DN The Fully Qualified Distinguished Name that contains the users For an example see Figure 14 on page 92 e Group DN The Fully Qualified Distinguished Name that contains the groups For an example see Figure 14 on page 92 Library User Group The name of the group on the LDAP server associated with library users who have user level privileges see Privilege Levels on page 80 for more information on user privilege levels This group must exist on your LDAP server see LDAP Server Guidelines on page 88 For an example see Figure 14 on page 92 e Library Admin Group The name of the group on the LDAP server associated with library users who have administrator level privileges see Privilege Levels on page 80 for more information on user privilege levels This group must exist on your LDAP server see LDAP Server Guidelines on page 88 For an example see Figure 14 on page 92 A sample of a completed dialog box is depicted below Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 91 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Working With LDAP User Accounts Remote Authentication Figure 14 LDAP Setup Example Simple LDAP Server Configuration 7 RO
114. I E Station Slots on page 62 for more information Note The AutoClean or manual cleaning feature on the library assumes that any tape cartridge imported into a cleaning slot is a cleaning tape cartridge regardless of the label on the cartridge or type of cartridge In order for a cleaning cartridge to be recognized by the library as such it must be imported into the library cleaning slot s Be sure to label and import cleaning cartridges appropriately See Chapter 11 Working With Cartridges and Barcodes and Valid Cleaning Cartridges on page 164 Note This operation should not be performed concurrently by multiple administrators logged in from different locations You can access the screen but you cannot apply changes while another administrator is performing the same operation Operator Panel Select Setup gt Dedicated Slots gt Cleaning Press Modify Use the Up and Down buttons to select a value from zero to 4 Press Apply Press Exit ao uf WN Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Web Client 1 Select Setup gt Cleaning Slots 2 Under the New Settings column select the number of cleaning slots to configure 3 Under Setup Drive Cleaning Interval the Current Settings column lists the number of cleaning slots that are currently configured in Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 61 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Configu
115. LS certificates are only available for use with SKM The Quantum supplied certificates come on a CD which you received The TLS certificates are bundled in a single file 1 Ensure that the date on both SKM servers and the library are set to the current date Incorrect date settings may interfere with the TLS certificates and cause the library to stop communicating with the SKM servers 2 Insert the CD into the CD ROM drive of your computer Either copy the file to a known location on your computer or use the CD as the location from which you will retrieve the file 3 From the Tools menu select EKM Management gt Import Communication Certificates The Tools EKM Communication Certificate Import screen opens Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 191 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Installing TLS Certificates on the Library Figure 35 Tools EKM Communication Certificate Tools EKM Communication Certificate Import Import TLS communication certificate s Note Transport layer security TLS certificates may be uploaded by browsing to the files and selecting Apply Fill out this Either individual certificates or a Quantum certificate bundle may be uploaded and installed section if installing user supplied Primary Server Available ee Available TLS certificates Root Certificate File Admin Certificate File Fill out this Admin Certificate Password sec
116. Library The log file is cleared and created new for each import operation so that it shows only the key corruptions and import failures that occurred during the latest encryption key import attempt For more information about library logs see SKM Encryption Key Import Warning Log with EKM License on page 229 The path to open the appropriate screen is as follows e From the Web client select Reports gt Log Viewer Viewing Audit Logs The EKM Audit Log reports the status of tape cartridges and partitions in the library The EKM audit log captures historical encryption key management configuration data with respect to any logical library partition listing events for encryption method changes for every logical library partition Upon partition creation modification and deletion the encryption method is also captured to have complete records as to when a partition was created when the encryption method was modified and when a partition and its respective encryption method was deleted The EKM Partition Method Activity section of the log shows when actions are performed that change a partition s encryption state and which user performed the action This section provides the following specific information e Timestamp date and time of any partition change operations e Partition Name name of the partition e EKM Method indicator of whether encryption was turned on or off at creation deletion or during modification
117. Library Es May 1 19 01 53 2019 sth di Subject E L SAN JOSE O QUANTUM OU QKM CN QKM CLIENT Secondary 5B Server Server May 1 19 01 08 2019 GI May 1 19 01 08 2009 G Valid C US S CA L SAN J C US CA L SAN J ADMIN 000081 Issuer C US S CA L SAN Subject C US CA L SAN J Issuer C US S CA L SAN J Subject CUS S CA L SAN J ject 000031 Issuer C US S CA L SAN J Subject C US S CA L SAN J Issuer C US S CA L SAN J C US S CA L SAN J Subject 999934 Issuer Subject JOSE O QUANTUM OU MFG CN QKM CA OSE O QUANTUM OU MFG CN QKM CA OSE O QUANTUM OU akm_admin CN QKM OSE O QUANTUM OU MFG CN QKM CA OSE O QUANTUM OU MFG CN QKM CA OSE O QUANTUM OU QKM CN QKM TLS OSE O QUANTUM OU MFG CN QKM CA OSE O QUANTUM OU MFG CN QKM CA OSE O QUANTUM OU MFG CN QKM CA OSE O QUANTUM OU QKM CN QKM TLS Quantum Scala r 140 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Performing Scalar Key Manager Functions Available on the Library Generating Data Caution Every time you generate new data encryption keys you Encryption Keys must back up both SKM servers before you begin using the keys to encrypt data Refer to the Scalar Key Manager User s Guide for instructions Data encryption keys are generated in sets of a specified quantity see the Scalar Key Manager User s Guide for more information The library tracks data encryption key usage and reminds you to generate more k
118. Mail Account on page 75 for more information Note To access the Media Security log your library must have an Advanced Reporting license To learn more about the Advanced Reporting license refer to Advanced Reporting on page 13 Media removal is detected by the library when it performs an inventory at boot up after an open door is closed etc The media security log lists media that have been removed from the library By default the library collects nothing and the log is empty You can configure the library to collect information about media removal and then view save and or e mail the log Refer to Working with the Media Security Log on page 126 Note To access the Media Usage log your library must have an Advanced Reporting license To learn more about the Advanced Reporting license refer to Advanced Reporting on page 13 The media usage log lists media usage information regarding capacity and read and write errors for media ever mounted in a drive including Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide SKM Encryption Key Import Warning Log with EKM License Tape Drive Log Chapter 8 Getting Information About the Library Viewing Saving and E mailing Library Logs media that are no longer in the library Refer to Viewing the Media Usage Log on page 129 Note To access the SKM Encryption Key Import Warning log your library must have an Encryption Key Management EKM licen
119. O O Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide uiseiet allt iqlle Reports System Information Library Configuration Network Settings About Scalar i40 i80 ACCESS KEY All Users Mb i Open Source Licenses Menu Trees li 33 Chapter 3 Understanding the User Interface Menu Trees 34 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 4 Configuring the Library A Setup Wizard is available to assist you with the initial configuration of the library The Setup Wizard however contains only a subset of configuration tasks The operator panel and Web client menus provide access to all configuration options that are included in the Setup Wizard and many that are not This chapter covers the Setup Wizard and all of the other configuration options Paths to open the appropriate screens on both the operator panel and the Web client are given for each task For complete menu trees see Menu Trees on page 31 Note These operations should not be performed concurrently by multiple administrators logged in from different locations You can access the screens but you cannot apply changes while another administrator is performing the same operation Caution Always save the library configuration after modifying a configurable item This will allow you to restore the most current settings if necessary See Saving and Restoring the
120. Operator Panel Home Screen View 110 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 5 Advanced Reporting Advanced Reporting is a licensable feature You must have an Advanced Reporting license installed on your library in order to use the features described in this chapter For more information on licensing see Adding or Upgrading Licensable Features on page 68 The Advanced Reporting license applies to your entire library regardless of library size This means you only need to purchase the license once If you increase the size of your library your existing license applies to your new library configuration Note You can work with Advanced Reporting Data using only the Web client This chapter covers e Advanced Reporting Features e Working with Control Path Failover CPF e Using Advanced Reporting Reports e Configuring the Drive Resource Utilization Report e Configuring the Media Integrity Analysis Report e Using Advanced Reporting Templates e Loading and Reloading Advanced Reporting Data Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 111 Chapter 5 Advanced Reporting Advanced Reporting Features e Deleting Advanced Reporting Data e Saving and E mailing Advanced Reporting Data Filess e Working with the Media Security Log e Viewing the Media Usage Log e Automatically E mailing Advanced Reporting Reports and Logs Sa a a a a Advanced Reporting Feature
121. P authentication traps When the library receives an SNMP message that does not contain the correct community string or other authentication information the library sends an SNMP authentication trap message to the external management application indicating the authentication failure SNMP authentication traps are disabled by default Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Modifying the SNMP Community String Downloading the SNMP MIB Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Configuring SNMP Settings Web Client 1 Select Setup gt Network Management gt SNMP 2 Select the SNMP Authentication Traps check box under New Settings to enable SNMP authentication traps Clear the SNMP Authentication Traps check box to disable SNMP authentication traps Administrators can modify the SNMP community string The SNMP community string is a text string that acts as a password to authenticate GET and GET NEXT SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c messages exchanged between the library and an external management application The SNMP community string used by the library must match the string used by the external management application The default SNMP community string on the library is publicCmtyStr For security purposes this string should be modified When modifying the community string adhere to the following guidelines the community string is case sensitive cannot be empty and cannot exceed 32 characters You can modify the SNMP commun
122. Performing Library Operations Unlocking and Opening the I E Station Note that this does not completely remove library power you need to disconnect the power cords to do that e Disconnect the power cord from each power supply on the back of the library It may take 1 to 2 seconds for motion to completely stop Caution These methods are not recommended except in case of emergency where it is vital that library operations be stopped immediately If you do not first perform a shutdown as described in the sections above the following could occur The library may not complete closing all data and log files If you turn off power or unplug the power cord while writing to tape the data on the tape could become corrupted If you unplug the power cord the robot may become frozen in the middle of an operation and unable to move once library power is restored possibly requiring a service call Taking the Library Some maintenance activities require that the entire library be taken Offline offline To take the library offline change the mode of all partitions from online to offline See Taking a Partition Online or Offline on page 57 for instructions Unlocking and Opening the I E Station The I E station is locked during normal library operation To access the E station you must first unlock it When you give the command to unlock the I E station the robot physically moves to the unlock mechanism and unl
123. Quantum User s Guide 6 66545 10 Rev A Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 6 66545 10 Rev A August 2014 Product of U S A Quantum Corporation provides this publication as is without warranty of any kind either express or implied including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Quantum Corporation may revise this publication from time to time without notice Printed in USA COPYRIGHT STATEMENT Copyright 2014 by Quantum Corporation All rights reserved Your right to copy this manual is limited by copyright law Making copies or adaptations without prior written authorization of Quantum Corporation is prohibited by law and constitutes a punishable violation of the law TRADEMARK STATEMENT Quantum the Quantum logo and Scalar are registered trademarks of Quantum Corporation registered in the U S A and other countries Preserving the World s Most Important Data Yours StorageCare and Vision are trademarks of Quantum LTO and Ultrium are trademarks of IBM and Quantum in the U S A and other countries All other trademarks are the property of their respective companies Specifications are subject to change without notice ii Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Contents Preface xix Taking ESD Precautions 00 0c xxiii Worldwide End User Product Warranty xxvi Scalar i40 and i80 Supported Ver
124. Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 57 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Working With Partitions 58 e Offline SCSI hosts cannot control the partition In this mode library operations can be performed via the local or remote user interface Changing the partition mode changes whether or not the specified partition is online or offline to the host application Changing a partition mode using the library interface may affect your host application See your host application documentation for more information Note The library automatically turns partitions offline when performing certain operations and turns them back online again when the operation successfully completes If the operation fails the partitions will remain offline until you manually turn them back online again Evaluate the issue to determine if and when the partitions need to be brought online again When you are ready to bring the partitions back online you must do so manually from the Web client select Operations gt Partitions gt Change Mode Note Some maintenance activities require that the entire library be taken offline To take the library offline change the mode of all partitions from online to offline When you are changing the partition mode be aware of the following e When you access the Change Partition Mode screen you will see only partitions to which you have been given access e When changing the partition
125. Read write in LTO 6 tape drives supports WORM functionality LTO 5 Read write in LTO 5 and LTO 6 tape drives supports WORM functionality LTO 4 Read write in LTO 4 and LTO 5 tape drives read only in LTO 6 tape drives supports WORM functionality LTO 3 Read write in LTO 4 tape drives read only in LTO 5 tape drives supports WORM functionality LTO 2 Read write in LTO 2 and LTO 3 tape drives read only in LTO 4 tape drives DSS NN Supported Internet Browsers The Internet browser software is not supplied with the Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 systems you must obtain and install it independently The Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 systems support the following Internet browsers Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 283 Appendix A Specifications Supported Operating Systems Note For correct operation of the software disable any pop up blockers Microsoft Windows e Internet Explorer IE 7 0 8 0 and 9 0 Mozilla Firefox 3 5 x and 3 6 x and later Linux e Firefox 1 0 6 or later Solaris e Firefox 1 0 6 or later Supported Operating Systems The Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 systems support the following operating systems e Microsoft Windows Enterprise Server e Sun Solaris e HP UX IBM AIX e Red Hat Enterprise Linux 284 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Table 10 Tape Alert Flag Severity Codes Appendix B Tape Alert F
126. Safety and Regulatory Information 6 66773 xx Scalar 140 and Scalar i80 Basic SNMP Reference Guide 6 00423 xx Quantum Intelligent Libraries SCSI Reference Guide 6 01317 xx Quantum Intelligent Libraries SMI S Reference Guide 6 66531 xx Scalar Key Manager User s Guide For the most up to date product information and documentation see http www quantum com ServiceandSupport Index aspx SCSI 2 Specification The SCSI 2 communications specification is the proposed American National Standard for information systems dated March 9 1990 Copies may be obtained from Global Engineering Documents 15 Inverness Way East Englewood CO 80112 800 854 7179 or 303 397 2740 xxiv Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Contacts Comments Getting More Information or Help Quantum Global Services Preface For information about contacting Quantum including Quantum office locations go to http www quantum com aboutus contactus index aspx To provide comments or feedback about this document or about other Quantum technical publications send e mail to doc comments quantum com StorageCare Quantum s comprehensive service approach leverages advanced data access and diagnostics technologies with cross environment multi vendor expertise to resolve backup issues faster and at lower cost Accelerate service issue resolution with these exclusive Quantum StorageCare services
127. See Figure 37 on page 201 Figure 37 Accessing the Encryption Partition Configuration Screen Setup Encryption Partition Configuration Set up Library Managed Encryption LME for library partitions Partition EKM Type LME Key Reuse library_a SKM M F library_b SKM l Click here to run EKM Path Diagnostics APES 3 Select an SKM partition configured for Library Managed Encryption and temporarily disable Library Managed Encryption by clearing the check box under LME see Figure 38 on page 202 Remember which partition it is because you will be changing it back in a few minutes 4 Click Apply Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 201 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Performing Scalar Key Manager Functions Available on the Library Caution When you change the partition s encryption method to Application Managed LME disabled the data that was written to the tapes while the partition was configured for LME enabled can no longer be read until you change the partition back to LME enabled You will only be disabling for a short time and then changing back to LME enabled just to trigger the key generation process so this should have little effect unless you forget to turn it back to LME enabled Figure 38 Changing Encryption Method to Application Managed LME disabled Partition EKM Type Key Reuse library_a Setup Encryption Partition Configuration Set up Library Managed Encr
128. This chapter describes how to work with cartridges and barcodes When working with tape cartridges certain considerations should be taken into account For example all tape cartridges in the library must have a barcode label In addition when loading your library you should be aware of whether or not your cartridges are write protected This section discusses these types of items in general terms See Supported Media on page 283 for information on what type of tape cartridges are supported for each drive type This chapter covers e Handling Tape Cartridges Properly e Write Protecting Tape Cartridges e Supported Barcode Formats e Barcode Label Requirements e Installing Barcode Labels Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 271 Chapter 11 Working With Cartridges and Barcodes Handling Tape Cartridges Properly Handling Tape Cartridges Properly To ensure the longest possible life for your cartridges follow these guidelines 272 Select a visible location to post procedures that describe proper media handling Ensure that anyone who handles cartridges has been properly trained on all procedures Do not drop or strike cartridges Excessive shock could damage the internal contents of cartridges or the casings themselves rendering the cartridges unusable Do not expose cartridges to direct sunlight or sources of heat including portable heaters and heating ducts Store cartridges in a loc
129. User s Guide Viewing the Current Partitions Changing Access to Partitions Taking a Partition Online or Offline Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Working With Partitions You can view basic details about all of your partitions including online offline status control path tape drive number of tape drives in the partition number of storage slots and number of I E station slots available to the partition Operator Panel 1 Select Reports gt Partitions alternatively select Setup gt Configure Partitions gt View Current Partitions 2 If more than one partition is configured on the library select a partition and press Select Web Client You can view partition information in several places e Library home page see Web Client Home Page on page 29 e Library configuration report see Viewing the Library Configuration Report on page 220 e Partition modification screen select Setup gt Configure Partitions select a partition and click Modify An administrator can control which partitions a specified user can access by modifying the user s account on the Web client For more information see Working With Local User Accounts and Passwords on page 79 Web Client Select Setup gt User Management gt User Accounts There are two partition modes online and offline e Online SCSI hosts control the partition In this mode all host application SCSI commands are processed
130. User Accounts on the Web Client 83 Enabling and Creating Passwords on the Operator Panel 83 Disabling Passwords on the Operator Panel 86 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide v Contents Modifying Passwords on the Operator Panel 86 Resetting Passwords on the Operator Panel 87 Working With LDAP User Accounts Remote Authentication 87 Local Authentication vs Remote Authentication 87 LDAP Server Guidelines 0 0 0 2 00 cee eee ee 88 Configuring Secure LDAP on the Library 89 Configuring LDAP on the Library 005 89 Testing LDAP Settings 00 000 e eee eee ee 93 Configuring Kerberos 0 aaaea eee 93 Generating the Kerberos Service Keytab File 95 Setting the Session Timeout uaaa uaaa ee 96 Configuring System Settings 0 000 cee eee 97 Unload Assist 0 0 0 0 0 cee 97 Logical Serial Number Addressing 00 005 98 Manual Cartridge Assignment 0000 0 eee ee 99 SNMP sisededa vnnn daaar ddd gda ive ote radigaias 100 SMIS 29 fa da dee ed yee bee ee ek ee ed be 100 Power Save eee eee teen 101 Configuring Security Settings 0 0 00 eee ee 102 Network Interface 0 0 0 0 0c ee 102 SSH SeIWiC S e ereus Bea ebur ve ce ce eee Ree EES Ree aes 103 Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP 103 Remote Access Via Web Client 0 0
131. Web client only Web Client 1 Select Setup gt Notification gt E mail Account The Setup E mail Account screen displays Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 75 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Configuring the Library E Mail Account 2 Inthe SMTP server text box type the IP address or host name of the SMTP server Note IP addresses may be entered using the IPv4 dot notation or using the IPv6 format IPv4 addresses must be entered in dot notation for example 192 168 0 1 IPv4 address text boxes do not allow values exceeding 255 for dot separated values 3 In the Sender e mail address text box type an e mail address for the SMTP server for example scalar i40 mycompany com The sender address indicates the originator of the e mail message 4 For Send snapshot with e mail notifications do one of the following e To attach a library snapshot file to e mail notifications select the check box e To not attach a library snapshot file to e mail notifications clear the check box Note Send snapshot with e mail notifications instructs the library to automatically attach a library snapshot file ASCII format to most e mail notifications This feature is turned off by default Library snapshot files can also be sent to specified e mail addresses using the capture snapshot operation The capture snapshot operation allows you to create the snapshot in ASCII format See Capturing Snapshots of Libra
132. a that has been removed from the library e Media Usage Log Lists information on all media that have ever been in the library For information on how to use the advanced reporting features see Advanced Reporting on page 111 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 13 Chapter 1 Description Licensable Features Encryption Key Management 14 The Encryption Key Management EKM license enables tape drive transparent encryption using library managed encryption The EKM license applies to the entire library regardless of how many slots are licensed If you increase the number of slots in your library your existing license applies to your new library configuration For more information about EKM see Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide E Chapter 2 Unpacking the Library Choose a location in which to install the library that is as free from dust as possible Dust can damage or degrade performance of library components and media Refer to the following sections of this manual for important information that you need when installing and setting up your library e Environmental Specifications on page 279 e Taking ESD Precautions on page xxiii Note Unpack the library as close to the installation location as possible 1 Inspect the outer library packaging for damage If there is any damage evident on the library packaging do not continue
133. able cartridge barcodes Click the Help button next to the Find button for more information about filtering barcodes In addition if not all cartridges appear on the screen use the Page 1 of x arrows to view the additional cartridges Note Bold column headings in the table can be sorted For example selecting the Location column heading will sort by location coordinates 5 In the Select Destination section select the destination tape drive 6 Click Apply 7 Click OK to confirm it is OK to take the partition offline Unloading Tape Drives The Unload Drive operation allows you to unload a cartridge from a tape drive to a storage slot The storage slot and tape drive must be assigned to the same partition Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 161 Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Performing Media Operations 162 This topic focuses on using the library user interface not the host application to unload tape drives Using the library to unload tape drives may necessitate performing an inventory with the host application See your host application documentation for more information Details about unloading tape drives include The tape drive and storage slot must be assigned to the same partition Only drives with media loaded appear on the screen You can select only partitions to which you have been given access If the affected partition is online it will be taken offline before the unlo
134. ad operation is performed and brought back online after it is complete You can unload media from the operator panel or the Web client Operator Panel 1 Select Actions gt Tape Drive gt Unload 2 If more than one tape drive is installed in the library use the Up and Down buttons to select a tape drive to unload 3 Press Unload Web Client 1 Select Operations gt Drive gt Unload 2 If more than one partition exists select the partition that contains the tape drive you want to unload 3 Click Next The Unload Drive Partition Mode screen displays where Partition is the name of the partition and Mode is the current mode of the partition The screen contains a list of all tape drives in the partition that are loaded with a cartridge 4 Select the tape drive you want to unload Note If not all drives appear on the screen use the Page 1 of x arrows to view the additional cartridges Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Cleaning Tape Drives Note Bold column headings in the table can be sorted For example selecting the Location column heading will sort by location coordinates 5 Click Apply 6 Click OK to confirm it is OK to take the partition offline The library attempts to unload the tape cartridge and move it into the storage slot it was in when it was originally loaded into the tape drive If that storage slot is full the library will attempt
135. age 38 Resetting factory defaults clears e Most of the library s configurable items such as partitions user accounts import export I E station slots cleaning slots All diagnostic tickets and log information e Any tape drive firmware images uploaded manually Resetting factory defaults does NOT clear Date and time network configuration or license key settings nor does it change the library firmware version You may want to reset factory defaults if you are completely reinstalling or reconfiguring the library If you downgrade your library s firmware version to an earlier released version library configuration settings will be reset to the factory defaults for the newly installed firmware If you upgrade firmware your library configuration settings remain as you have set them Web Client On the Web client this feature is only available to service users using the service login and password Operator Panel On the operator panel if logins are disabled default this operation is available to all users If logins are enabled this operation is only available to service users using the service login and password 1 Select Tools gt Reset Factory Defaults A message displays stating that configuration data will be cleared and library rebooted 2 Press Yes to continue 270 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide P Chapter 11 Working With Cartridges E and Barcodes
136. agnostics 6 SKM Only Back up both SKM servers following the instructions in the Scalar Key Manager User s Guide Caution You must back up both SKM servers every time you generate new data encryption keys to protect against catastrophic server failure Step 8 Save the Library See Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 for instructions Configuration EKM Path Diagnostics The EKM Path Diagnostics consists of a series of short tests to validate whether the key servers are running connected and able to serve keys as required There are two ways to run EKM Path Diagnostics e Manually Run the Manual EKM Path Diagnostics any time you change the key server settings or library encryption settings See Running Manual EKM Path Diagnostics on page 187 for details e Automatically This feature runs automatically in the background and generates diagnostic tickets if there are problems You can turn this feature off but it is recommended that you leave it on See Enabling Automatic EKM Path Diagnostics on page 188 for details Description The EKM Path Diagnostics consists of the following tests e Ping Verifies the Ethernet communication link between the library and the key servers e Path Verifies that EKM services are running on the key servers e Config Verifies that the key servers are capable of serving encryption keys 186 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide
137. alar Key Manager Functions Available on the Library Figure 36 Checking and Installing TLS Certificates Tools EKM Communication Certificate Import Import TLS communication certificate s Note Transport layer security TLS certificates may be uploaded by browsing to the files and selecting Apply Fill out this Either individual certificates or a Quantum certificate bundle may be uploaded and installed section if installing user supplied Primary Server Available pti Available TLS S certificates Root Certificate File e Admin Certificate File B e Fill out this Admin Certificate Password section if installing Client Certificate File B Quantum Client Certificate Password Uss ANimin s Password supplied TLS certificates Use the Quantum Certificate Bundle Quantum Communication Certificate Bundle File Browse _ Tells you whether TLS TLS communication certificates are currently installed on the library certificates Type cS Serial Number Valid Between Dates Status l ssuer and Subject OSE O QUANTUM OU MFG CN QKM CA are currently installed on the library 198 May 1 17 45 39 2009 GMT ssuer C US CA L SAN J s s Roa bray AC3141FD4627D May 4 17 45 39 2019 G d Subject C US S CA L SAN JOSE O QUANTUM OU MFG CN QKM CA C US S CA L SAN JOSE O QUANTUM OU MFG CN QKM CA aer 5 5 i May 1 19 01 53 2009 GMT x x r 7 Client
138. alar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 55 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Working With Partitions 56 page 148 If you do this be sure to only remove cartridges assigned to that partition see Viewing the Library Configuration Report on page 220 After a partition is deleted its resources for example tape drives and slots become available and can be reassigned to new or existing partitions Deleting a partition does not delete users assigned to that partition However if these users are not assigned to other partitions they will not be able to perform any library operations For information on how to assign a user to another partition see Changing Access to Partitions on page 57 Note You may need to modify settings in your host application as a result of deleting a partition See your host application documentation You can delete partitions on both the operator panel and the Web client Operator Panel 1 Select Setup gt Configure Partitions gt Delete Partition 2 If more than one partition is configured on the library use the Up and Down buttons to select a partition from the list Press Delete 4 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Web Client 1 Select Setup gt Partitions 2 Select a partition and click Delete 3 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80
139. an be enabled or disabled It is disabled by default You can delete e mail notifications on the Web client only 74 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Configuring the Library E Mail Account Web Client 1 Select Setup gt Notification gt Setup 2 Select an e mail notification and click Delete A confirmation dialog box displays 3 Click OK 4 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Configuring the Library E Mail Account The library uses the library e mail account whenever library e mail services are used such as when the library automatically sends e mail notifications about library issues Before configuring the e mail account ask your network administrator for the IP address valid login account optional and valid password optional of your SMTP server E mail account settings are not case sensitive Note You may use a host name for the SMTP server instead of an IP address only if the library is set up to use Domain Name System DNS servers See Default Gateway Subnet Mask Network Prefix and DNS Addresses on page 41 for more information After configuring the e mail account you can send a test message to an e mail address to verify that the account is configured properly You must have administrator privileges to configure the e mail account You can configure the library e mail account from the
140. aning cartridge to import or select ALL to import all cleaning cartridges The ALL option is only available if there are enough empty cleaning slots in the library to accommodate all the cleaning cartridges 3 Press Import The library moves the cleaning cartridge to a previously configured cleaning slot Importing Cleaning Cartridges via the Web Client 1 Select Operations gt Cleaning Media gt Import The Operations Import Cleaning Media screen displays This screen contains a list of the cleaning cartridges in the I E station If no cleaning slots are configured a message displays stating that the library cannot import cleaning cartridges 2 Note the number of empty cleaning slots that appear in the Total Empty Cleaning Slots field on the right side of the screen The number of cleaning cartridges you can import is limited to the number of empty cleaning slots Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 167 Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Cleaning Tape Drives Exporting Cleaning Cartridges 168 3 Select one or more cleaning cartridges to import An error displays if the number of selected cleaning cartridges is more than the number of empty cleaning slots Note If not all cartridges appear on the screen use the Page 1 of x arrows to view the additional cartridges Note Bold column headings in the table can be sorted For example selecting the Location column heading will sort by
141. antum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Preface Scalar i40 and i80 Quantum provides support for the current release and the two previous Supported Versions major releases For example since i4 is the latest release Quantum supports releases i4 i3 and i2 Releases earlier than i2 are not supported Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide xxvii Preface xxviii Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 1 Description This chapter covers the layout and basic functionality of the library including e Overview e Library Components e Standard Features e Licensable Features Overview The Scalar i40 and i80 tape libraries automate the retrieval storage and management of tape cartridges Tape cartridges are stored in the library and mounted and dismounted from tape drives using firmware running on the library or software running on the host systems See Appendix A Specifications for library capacity and a list of tape drives and media supported by the Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 libraries Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 1 Chapter 1 Description Library Components Library Components Front Panel Figure 1 illustrates the features of the operator panel The picture shows the Scalar i40 but the features are the same on the Scalar i80 These features are described in Table 1 Figure 1 Front Panel Operator panel screen Navigati
142. ap encrypt the encryption keys to protect them during transport to you This function is available to administrators and only applies to SKM servers Both SKM servers must be connected and operational in order to import encryption keys Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Performing Scalar Key Manager Functions Available on the Library To export an encryption certificate 1 Before starting this process read and follow the sequence of steps outlined in Sharing Encrypted Tape Cartridges on page 203 2 From the Tools menu select EKM Management gt Encryption Certificate gt Export See Figure 40 E ennie lintels Setup Operations Tools Reports User admin Adm E tion Certificat i i Tools SKM Encryption Certificate Export Export allows you to export the native certificate to a file that can be imported into another SKM Server Note Certificates exported via this page may be imported to other SKM servers for use in encryption key export operations tini 3 Click Apply to export your SKM server s native encryption certificate 4 Click Close to close the Progress Window In the File Download dialog box that appears click Save 6 In the Save As dialog box that opens choose a location in which to save the file then click Save Importing Encryption The encryption certificate contains a public key that is used to wrap Certificates encrypt encryption keys prior t
143. apter 6 Performing Library Operations Cleaning Tape Drives Manually Cleaning Tape Drives 170 When a tape drive needs cleaning it notifies the library If the library s AutoClean feature is not enabled meaning no cleaning slots have been configured the library generates a diagnostic ticket informing you that the tape drive needs cleaning Details about manually cleaning tape drives include Be sure to unload the tape drive before attempting to clean it If the tape drive is loaded with a cartridge it will not be available for this operation Be sure to use a valid cleaning cartridge If you use a data cartridge for example the operation will not complete and the library will issue a diagnostic ticket See Valid Cleaning Cartridges on page 164 If you have at least one cleaning slot configured see Configuring Cleaning Slots on page 59 the library uses a cleaning cartridge from either the topmost I E station slot or a configured cleaning slot If the cleaning cartridge is in the top I E station slot and manual cartridge assignment is enabled assign the cleaning cartridge to the System partition e On the Web client you can choose to use a configured cleaning slot or the topmost I E station slot If two or more cleaning slots are configured and have cleaning cartridges in them the library chooses which cleaning cartridge to use e On the operator panel the library chooses which cleaning cartridge to use in
144. ar i80 and three buttons O Home Brings you to the home page B Help Displays the online help Logout Logs out of the current session A message in the header alerts you when the robot is not ready to perform library functions See Troubleshooting Library Not Ready Messages on page 254 for more information on Library Not Ready messages displayed in the header Menu bar Displays the available menu choices The choices vary depending on login privileges The far right of the menu bar also displays the name of the logged in user with the associated privilege level indicated in brackets If a menu item selected has a sub menu then gt is displayed to the right of the item Active display The active display provides information or menu items according to the selected menu item or operation Web Client Home Page The home page displays status and health information in the active display portion of the window see Figure 11 on page 28 See System Summary and Subsystem Status below for more information Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 29 Chapter 3 Understanding the User Interface Web Client System Summary Subsystem Status 30 The system summary is available on the home page of the Web client It provides tabular data on the capacity of the library s partitions slots and tape drives It also displays whether partitions are online or offline
145. are now installed in the library At the bottom of the page is a statement letting you know whether the certificates are currently installed In addition the three rows of the table at the bottom of the screen should be filled in with the correct information Follow these instructions to install your own TLS certificates for SKM or when installing TLS certificates for KMIP key managers When providing your own certificates it is assumed you understand the concepts of PKI and can access the tools or third party resources needed to generate or obtain certificates Note If you are using SKM you must be running SKM 1 1 or higher on your SKM servers in order to install your own TLS certificates If you install your own TLS certificates on the library you must also install your own certificates on the SKM servers Similarly if you use the Quantum provided TLS certificates on the SKM servers you must also use the Quantum provided TLS certificates on the library See the Scalar Key Manager User s Guide for information about installing TLS certificates on the SKM servers Note If you are using KMIP key managers your KMIP server provider will provide TLS communication certificates Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 193 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Installing TLS Certificates on the Library You must provide the following certificates Encryption System Certificates Required SKM Root Certif
146. artition triggers the library to check both SKM servers to see if new data encryption keys are needed If so it creates the keys Note The key generation process takes 15 minutes to an hour depending on network performance and quantity of keys already used The library notifies you when the process completes During key generation and backup the SKM server will not be able to process any library requests for data encryption keys You should not run any library or host initiated operations on SKM partitions during key generation and backup Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Performing Scalar Key Manager Functions Available on the Library Caution Avoid manually generating keys on more than five libraries simultaneously as the key generation process is resource intensive on the server Generating keys manually on more than five libraries at once could result in a failure to complete the key generation operation or interfere with key retrieval operations If a failure does occur during key generation wait 10 minutes then try to start it again The key generation process will resume from where the error was encountered To manually generate data encryption keys 1 Make sure that both SKM servers are running and operational 2 From the library s Web client access the encryption partition configuration screen Setup gt Encryption gt Partition Configuration
147. ary Using Advanced Reporting Features Using Advanced Reporting Features Advanced Reporting features are only available if you have Advanced Reporting licensed on the library See Chapter 5 Advanced Reporting for more information Viewing the Open Source License Agreement A number of open source packages were used to create the library firmware You can view the open source license agreement on the Web client Web Client Select Reports gt About gt Open Source Licenses Viewing the Copyright Statement Operator Panel Select Reports gt Copyright Statement Web Client Available in the Web client online help To view the help click the Help icon in the upper right corner of the screen B Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 233 Chapter 8 Getting Information About the Library Viewing the Copyright Statement 234 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 9 Updating Firmware This chapter covers updating library and tape drive firmware including Updating Library Firmware Updating and Autoleveling Tape Drive Firmware About Tape Drive Firmware Autoleveling Uploading Tape Drive Firmware Used in Autoleveling Deleting Tape Drive Firmware Used in Autoleveling Initiating Tape Drive Firmware Autoleveling Updating Library Firmware The library firmware update operation allows you to update library firmware using the Web client With the library firmware u
148. ary firmware version i6 or later To check for newer library firmware versions check the Quantum Web site at http www quantum com ServiceandSupport SoftwareandDocumentationDownloads SI40 Index aspx for more information about compatible firmware About Key Reuse 178 When using Library Managed Encryption LME to encrypt data in library partitions you can choose to re use encryption keys Each time a tape cartridge is mounted in a drive and data is written to the beginning of a tape cartridge a new key is retrieved from the Encryption Key Management EKM server with which to encrypt the data By default any previously used encryption keys are not reused and a brand new encryption key is retrieved each time data is written to the beginning of the tape In large tape libraries where tapes are over written repeatedly this scenario could require the maintenance of tens of thousands of encryption keys being managed for only a small fraction of that number of data tape cartridges For example if 10 tape cartridges are written from the beginning of tape each day then 3650 keys would be used to encrypt 10 tapes after one year 7300 would be used by the same 10 tapes after two years and so on Key reuse allows the previously used encryption key to be used to re write the same tape if the previously used key can be determined and verified with the key server If the tape is lost or security is compromised Quantum Scalar i40 and Scala
149. asswords are not configured on the operator panel login to the operator panel is not required Multiple users can be logged in to the library at the same time The same user can be logged from multiple locations Note that multiple users logged in from different locations cannot make changes to configuration settings or perform certain library functions simultaneously The screens are visible but access is denied Whichever one is logged in first has access to the screen until they exit the screens When you first boot up the library the operator panel does not require you to log in In fact if you do not configure passwords for the operator panel you never need to log in to the operator panel see Enabling and Creating Passwords on the Operator Panel on page 83 for more information To log in to the Web client for the first time 1 Make note of your library s IP address From the operator panel select Reports gt Network Settings to display the IP address 2 Enter the IP address in your Internet browser to bring up the Web client login screen 3 Enter the default user name and password e Default user name admin e Default password password 4 Click OK After you log in for the first time change the password for the default admin account See Modifying Local User Accounts on the Web Client on page 82 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Logging in Using the Operator Panel Logging in Via the W
150. ath for the partition State ready active mounted WWNN if Fibre Channel or SAS address if SAS Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 231 Chapter 8 Getting Information About the Library Viewing Library Information on the Operator Panel Viewing Network Settings Viewing the Date Time and Time Zone Viewing Licenses Operator Panel 1 Select Reports gt Tape Drives 2 If the library contains more than one tape drive use the Up and Down buttons to select a tape drive and press Select A short report on the operator panel displays the library s network settings host name IP address and network configuration Operator Panel 1 Select Reports gt Network Settings 2 If IPv6 is enabled the IPv4 information is shown on the first screen Press Next to see the IPv6 address information on the next two or more screens Although the library can have unlimited IPv6 address a maximum of three are shown in this report The operator panel displays the current date time and time zone configured on the library Operator Panel Select Reports gt Date Time The operator panel displays a list of all the licenses currently installed on the library number of COD slots licensed number of unlicensed slots and whether Advanced Reporting is licensed Operator Panel Select Reports gt Licenses Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 8 Getting Information About the Libr
151. ation that is as free from dust as possible Dust can damage or degrade performance of tape media Store cartridges in a vertical orientation not horizontally Vertical orientation is particularly important for long term or archival storage If cartridges must be stacked horizontally for moving and handling do not stack cartridges more than five high The operating temperature range for Linear Tape Open LTO cartridges is 50 F to 113 F 10 C to 45 C The operating relative humidity range is 10 to 80 non condensing If cartridges have been exposed to temperatures outside the range specified above stabilize the cartridges at normal operating room temperature for the same amount of time they were exposed to extreme temperatures or 24 hours whichever is less Temperatures above 125 F 52 C can cause permanent damage Do not place cartridges near sources of electromagnetic energy or strong magnetic fields such as computer monitors electric motors speakers or x ray equipment Exposure to electromagnetic energy or magnetic fields can destroy data and the embedded servo code written on the media by the cartridge manufacturer rendering the cartridges unusable Place barcode labels only in the designated slots on the cartridges Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 11 Working With Cartridges and Barcodes Write Protecting Tape Cartridges e Ifyou ship cartridges ship them in their original packaging o
152. ations 2 Click one of the following buttons to perform these actions e Create Adds the IP address and port number of the external application to the list of registered addresses that will be sent SNMP traps e Delete Deletes a selected IP address and port number e Test This test simply sends the traps it does not check to see if they were received You must check the external management applications to verify that the traps were received Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 43 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Configuring SNMP Settings Enabling SNMP Versions Enabling SNMP Authentication Traps The library supports SNMP v1 v2c and v3 You can enable or disable support for SNMP v1 and v2c They are enabled by default The recommended practice is to disable SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c in highly secure environments SNMP v3 is always enabled and cannot be disabled The authentication algorithm is set to MD5 and the encryption is disabled system wide Operator Panel 1 Select Setup gt Security Services gt SNMP V1 V2 2 Press Modify 3 Use the Up and Down buttons to select Enabled or Disabled and press Apply 4 Press Exit Web Client 1 Select Setup gt Network Management gt SNMP 2 Select the SNMP V1 and V2c check box under New Settings to enable SNMP v1 and v2c Clear the SNMP V1 and V2c check box to disable SNMP v1 and v2c The library allows you to enable or disable SNM
153. before you can import unassigned cartridges as described in the Note above 5 Continue using one of these options e Importing Cartridges via the Operator Panel on page 154 e Importing Cartridges via Web Client on page 155 Importing Cartridges via the Operator Panel You can import one cartridge at a time or all cartridges at once using the operator panel 1 Select Actions gt I E gt Import Tape 2 If the cartridges in the I E station are assigned to multiple partitions select the partition into which you want to import 3 If there is more than one cartridge in the I E station use the Up and Down buttons to select a cartridge to import or select ALL to import all cartridges The ALL option is only available if there are enough empty slots in the selected partition to accommodate all the cartridges 4 Press Import The library imports the tape cartridge s into the first empty slot s in the partition 154 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Bulk Loading Tape Cartridges Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Performing Media Operations Importing Cartridges via Web Client Select Operations gt Media gt Import If more than one partition exists select the partition into which you want to import cartridges and click Next The Import Media Partition Mode screen displays where Partition is the name of the partition and Mode is the current mode of the partition This screen contains
154. calar 180 System Control Board Replacement Tape Drives Every library configuration must contain at least one tape drive See Appendix A Specifications for a list of tape drives and media supported by the Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 libraries The library supports mixing different tape drive types within the library and within partitions For information on how to do this see Working With Partitions on page 49 Tape drives are installed into tape drive slots in the rear of the library If a tape drive slot is empty a filler plate must cover the empty slot see Figure 5 on page 10 Caution Filler plates are required to maintain proper library cooling Do not run the library with uncovered slots SAS tape drives have one status LED Fibre Channel tape drives contain a status and a link LED For more information on tape drive LEDs see Tape Drive Sled LEDs on page 260 All tape drives contain only one cable connector For information on removing and replacing tape drives see 6 66567 XX Scalar 140 and Scalar 180 Tape Drives Replacement Installed Tape Drive Location Coordinates Installed tape drives have a two digit location coordinate These are the coordinates shown in the library configuration report The first digit is always zero The second digit indicates the location of the tape drive relative to the other tape drives The bottommost tape drive has location coordinates 0 1 the next to bottom has locatio
155. cation specified by the administrator on a computer see Exporting Encryption Certificates on page 204 The destination administrator e mails the Encryption Certificate file to the source administrator The source administrator saves the Encryption Certificate file to a location on a computer and then imports the Encryption Certificate onto the source SKM server see Importing Encryption Certificates on page 205 The source administrator exports the Encryption Keys assigning the same Encryption Certificate noted above to wrap encrypt the keys The file containing the wrapped encryption keys is saved to a location on a computer specified by the source administrator See Exporting Data Encryption Keys on page 206 The source administrator e mails the file containing the wrapped encryption keys to the destination administrator The destination administrator saves the file containing the wrapped encryption keys to a location on a computer and then imports the keys onto the destination SKM server see Importing Data Encryption Keys on page 208 The destination library can now read the encrypted tapes For more information about the key servers and Library Managed Encryption best practices please refer to the Scalar Key Manager User s Guide To receive encryption keys from another SKM server you must first send your native encryption certificate to that server The public key contained in the certificate will be used to wr
156. change the value of each segment When you reach the value you want press the Right button As you press Right the value fills in and you go to the next segment To edit a previous entry press the Left button until you reach the entry and edit as before For multiple fields continue to press Right after each entry until you reach the last entry At this point the Right button designation changes to Apply Press the Apply button The new information displays Press Exit to exit For an example see Figure 10 on page 26 To scroll through a list of items or to edit letters and numbers you can press the appropriate button repeatedly to scroll one item at a time or you can hold the button down for fast scrolling through the available options To exit a screen press the Exit button To cancel an operation without saving any changes press the Cancel button If you are in the middle of making changes repeatedly press the Left button until you are back at the first field on the screen then press the Cancel button Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 25 Chapter 3 Understanding the User Interface Web Client Figure 10 Using the Buttons to Set the Date and Time Setup idle Jo Enter local date and time TMZ Amer ica Denver Date 04 12 10 Time 24hr o9 Left pom up Right Web Client Tips The Web client interface is accessible from supported Web browsers see Supported In
157. character barcode number followed by a media ID for example XXXXXXL3 Six character barcode and media ID are reported to the host Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 53 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Working With Partitions 54 e Extended Five to 15 characters total including a barcode number and optional media ID All characters are reported to the host regardless of having a media ID or not If a media ID is included the label must have a five to 13 character barcode followed by a media ID for example XXXXXL2 or XXXXXXXXXXXXXL2 If a media ID is not included the label must have a five to 15 character barcode for example XXXXX or XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX e Media ID Last Five to 13 character barcode number followed by media ID for example XXXXXXXXXXXXXL4 The media ID is reported to the host last e Media ID First Five to 13 character barcode number followed by a two character media ID for example XXXXXXXXXXXXXL4 The media ID is reported to the host first as in LAXXXXXXXXXXXXX e Standard default Five to 15 characters total including a barcode number and optional media ID The media ID is not reported to the host If a media ID is included the label must have a five to 13 character barcode followed by a media ID for example XXXXXL3 or XXXXXXXXXXXXXL3 If a media ID is not included the label must have a five to 15 character barcode for exam
158. cket if there are problems 4 Interval If Automatic EKM Path Diagnostics is enabled select the interval at which the library performs the diagnostics 5 SSL Connection e SKM SSL is always enabled The SSL port number is always 6000 e KMIP Key Manager SSL is always enabled Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 181 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Scalar Key Manager SKM on the Library 6 182 Note For SKM and KMIP Key Manager the library actually uses Transport Layer Security TLS a more secure successor to SSL to communicate with the encryption servers Key Server IP Address or Host Name In the text boxes assign your key servers in the order in which you want failover to occur The column denotes the server failover order Once you add the servers you can change the failover order by clicking the up down arrow buttons in the Order column Note SKM requires two servers KMIP Key Manager requires at least two servers and can have up to 10 servers for increased failover capacity For an initial key request the library tries server 1 the primary server first If server 1 is not available to perform a key request the library tries server 2 For KMIP key managers if server 2 is not available the library will try server 3 and so on in order Once the library identifies a server that can perform the request this server remains the active server until it fails a
159. close button X in the upper right corner of the Web client closes the browser window but does not log you out Sorting Information in You can sort information displayed in tables if the table column heading Tables is bold Click the column heading and the information will sort Click again to toggle from ascending to descending Web Client Layout and Figure 11 on page 28 shows the Web client interface Table 3 on Functions page 29 explains the Web client interface elements Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 27 Chapter 3 Understanding the User Interface Web Client Figure 11 Web Client User Interface Home Page Scalar i80 Library is not ready message area Home Online Logout help 9 F 10 Empty Cleaning Slots 0 Full Empty 48 I 4 Total Full Empty library 0 0 0 0 Drives 1 Total Active Avail library_a 1 0 o 0 Unassigned 0 View diagnostic tickets Header Menu bar System Summary VE Station Slots 10 Total library 10 Storage Slots 70 Active Status Total display library_a Online 50 Unassigned 20 Unlicensed 0 Subsystem Status 28 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 3 Understanding the User Interface Web Client Table 3 Web Client Screen i Elements Web Client Element Description Header The header is present on all pages and contains the library type Scalar i40 or Scal
160. code number and optional media ID All characters are reported to the host regardless of having a media ID or not If a media ID is included the label must have a five to 13 character barcode followed by a media ID for example XXXXXL2 or XXXXXXXXXXXXXL2 If a media ID is not included the label must have a five to 15 character barcode for example XXXXX or XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX e Media ID Last Five to 13 character barcode number followed by media ID for example XXXXXXXXXXXXXL4 The media ID is reported to the host last e Media ID First Five to 13 character barcode number followed by a two character media ID for example XXXXXXXXXXXXXL4 The media ID is reported to the host first as in LAXXXXXXXXXXXXX e Standard default Five to 15 characters total including a barcode number and optional media ID The media ID is not reported to the host If a media ID is included the label must have a five to 13 character barcode followed by a media ID for example XXXXXL3 or XXXXXXXXXXXXXL3 If a media ID is not included the label must have a five to 15 character barcode for example XXXXX or XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX D Installing Barcode Labels Each cartridge in the library must have an external label that is machine readable to identify the barcode Most manufacturers offer cartridges with the labels already applied or with the labels included that you can attach All barcode labels must be appl
161. computers kerbtest e For Windows 2008 ktpass out library keytab princ library lt fqdn of library gt lt realm gt rndPass ptype KRB5_NT_SRV_HST crypto AES256 SHA1 mapUser lt realm gt computers lt computer account gt For example ktpass out library keytab princ library delos dvt mycompany com OURREALM LOCAL rndPass ptype KRB5_NT_SRV_HST crypto AES256 SHA1 mapUser ourrealm local computers kerbtest aaa EEE Setting the Session Timeout The library automatically logs out a user or administrator when the library has detected no activity for a specified length of time This always occurs on the Web client and will occur on the operator panel if passwords are enabled see Enabling and Creating Passwords on the Operator Panel on page 83 The default session timeout is 15 minutes You can change that to 30 45 or 60 minutes You can only change this setting on the operator panel 96 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Configuring System Settings Operator Panel 1 Select Setup gt Account Settings gt Session Timeout The current timeout setting is highlighted 2 Use the Up and Down buttons to select the desired timeout 3 Press Apply 4 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Configuring System Settings You can enable disable the following system settings on the operator panel e Unload Assist
162. configuration settings Finally go back and change all the EKM partition settings to LME enabled 1 From the Web client select Setup gt Encryption gt System Configuration see Figure 31 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Scalar Key Manager SKM on the Library Figure 31 Configuring Setup Encryption System Configuration Encryption Settings an d Key Sot up the encryption key management server access for kbrary managed encryption Server Addresses Host names may be entered if DNS configured othermse enter IPr4 or IP 6 addresses only Note These ser r settings are only apphcable when a partibon s encrypbon method m set to hbrary managed encryphan save Si gt j gt Key Server Type SKM Automatic EKM Path Diagnostics 7 Enabled Interval 10 SSUTLS Connection Enabled 1 1020188 2 0 201789 Click here to run EKM Path Diagnostics 2 Key Server Type Select which encryption solution you plan to use SKM or KMIP Key Manager 3 Automatic EKM Path Diagnostics Enable or disable this feature and set the test interval as desired Quantum recommends accepting the default value For more information see Enabling Automatic EKM Path Diagnostics on page 188 When enabled this feature performs a check at specified intervals to make sure both key servers are connected to the library and functioning properly The library generates a diagnostic ti
163. cryption certificates 204 205 tape cartridges 152 tape cartridges unassigned 153 installation and verification test 262 Internet browsers supported 283 internet control message protocol 103 IP address configuring 40 IPv4 40 IPv6 40 library 137 IVT 262 K Kerberos 93 Kerberos service keytab file 95 key public 203 keys see data encryption keys Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide L LDAP accounts 87 configuring 89 server guidelines 88 LEDs 257 front panel 257 power supply 261 power on 3 system control board 259 tape drive sled 260 ticket indicator 3 library configuration record 222 report 220 saving 106 library managed encryption disabling 202 library name 39 library not ready messages 254 licensable features 68 license key certificate 68 license keys about 68 applying 70 chassis replacement and 68 obtaining 69 SCB replacement and 69 viewing 69 licenses encryption key management EKM 14 report 232 viewing 69 loading tape drives 160 local user accounts about 79 creating 81 deleting 83 modifying 82 location coordinates slot 5 tape drive 9 logged in user s report 224 logging off 138 automatically 138 logging on first time 136 Kerberos enabled 138 LDAP enabled 138 operator panel 137 simultaneous 136 Web client 137 logical serial number addressing 98 logs cleaning 227 diagnostic tickets 227 SKM encryption key import warning log 210 229 SKM server 209 tape
164. ct information is mailed to techsup quantum com along with diagnostic ticket information assuming that the default e mail notification has been configured see Creating E mail Notifications on page 72 You can set customer contact information from the Web client only Web Client 1 Select Setup gt Notification gt Contact Information 2 Enter or modify any of the information in the following text boxes e First Name e Last Name e Company Name e Phone Number Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 77 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Configuring the Service Port e E mail Address e System Description 3 Click Apply 4 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Configuring the Service Port There are two Ethernet ports on the SCB The left port is for customer use for remote access via the Web client and the right port is for service use only The default service port IP address is 192 168 177 1 You should never change the service port subnet unless it happens to conflict with the subnet configured for the customer port Incorrectly setting the service port subnet could impact connectivity of the customer port and network traffic attached to the customer port even when the service port is disconnected If there is a subnet conflict you must change the service port subnet to avoid ambiguity between the two interfaces The instructions below explain how to change th
165. d Reporting License Refer to Adding or Upgrading Licensable Features on page 68 e The control path and failover tape drives must both be LTO 5 or LTO 6 FC tape drives and you must have a minimum of two drives in a single partition e The control path and failover tape drives must have their topology configured as Point to Point Refer to Configuring Tape Drive Parameters on page 64 e The control path and failover tape drives must be connected to an NPIV enabled switch on the same fabric Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 113 Chapter 5 Advanced Reporting Working with Control Path Failover CPF When control path failover is configured for a partition the partition uses a virtual port as the control path communication port The World Wide Port Name WWPN for this virtual port is listed in the library s System Information Report in the Library Partitions section under Control Path see Viewing System Information on page 216 Configuring CPF You can configure control path failover from the Web client only Web Client 1 Setup the drive topology Set the topology for the control path and control path failover tape drives to Point to Point For more information refer to Configuring Tape Drive Parameters on page 64 a Select Setup gt Drive Settings The Setup Drive Settings screen displays Figure 15 Setup Drive Settings Screen Setup Drive Settings Modify the settings on Fibre C
166. d cleans it When finished it moves the cartridge back to the cleaning slot or IE station Taking a Tape Drive Online or Offline There are two tape drive modes online and offline e Online Tape drive is available for use This is the normal operating mode for the tape drive Offline Tape drive is offline to the host application and is not available for cartridge load and unload move operations initiated by the host application but it remains available for Web client or operator panel initiated move commands Note If a cartridge is already in the tape drive when you take the tape drive offline then the host can still read and write data on the tape Some operations require that the tape drive be offline You can take a tape drive offline rather than the entire library or partition so as to minimize disruption of library operations A drive taken offline will remain offline until you bring it back online or until the library is rebooted This topic focuses on using the library user interface not the host application to change the tape drive mode Using the library to change tape drive mode may affect the host application See your host application documentation for more information 172 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Taking a Tape Drive Online or Offline Details on changing the tape drive mode include e The online offline state follows the tape dri
167. d firmware revision number for all tape drives that the library supports whether or not they are installed in the library Select the tape drive firmware you want to delete 4 Click Delete The Progress Window displays The Progress Window contains information on the action elapsed time and status of the requested operation Do one of the following e If Success appears in the Progress Window the tape drive firmware was successfully deleted The library s default baseline tape drive firmware will now be used for autoleveling e If Failure appears in the Progress Window the tape drive firmware update was not successfully deleted 244 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 9 Updating Firmware Updating and Autoleveling Tape Drive Firmware 5 To initiate autoleveling see Initiating Tape Drive Firmware Autoleveling on page 245 Initiating Tape Drive Autoleveling occurs automatically at specific times whenever a tape Firmware Autoleveling drive is added replaced or power cycled when the library is rebooted or when you update library firmware If you upload or remove tape drive firmware separately from library firmware such as a Quantum provided upgrade or patch and want to autolevel the tape drives immediately follow these steps 1 Unload tape cartridges from all tape drives you want to autolevel 2 Stop all host commands to the tape drives you want to autolevel 3 Initiate autoleveling by perfor
168. d to both the Library User Group and the Library Admin Group on the LDAP server in order to test the LDAP settings on the library see Testing LDAP Settings on page 93 Since most normal users will not be members of both these groups you may need to create a special or temporary user specifically for this purpose 88 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Configuring Secure LDAP on the Library Configuring LDAP on the Library Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Working With LDAP User Accounts Remote Authentication You can configure Secure LDAP using one of two methods do not use both e LDAPS Uses Secure Sockets Layer SSL over a specific port for LDAP 636 You may enable LDAP over SSL LDAPS by entering a URI in the form of Idaps hostname in the Server URI field This will use SSL to send secure communication via port 636 If the LDAP server does not support LDAPS or does not have LDAPS enabled then login operations will fail LDAPS has been deprecated in favor of using StartTLS see option below Do not use LDAPS if you are using StartTLS Once you apply LDAPS StartTLS will not be available e StartTLS Uses Transport Layer Security TLS over the same port as regular LDAP 389 Select the StartTLS check box to configure secure LDAP communication using TLS If TLS mode is not supported on your LDAP server then login operations will fail Do not use StartTLS if you are using LDAPS
169. diagnostic tickets see About Diagnostic Tickets on page 248 If no diagnostic ticket s exists continue to next step e If Failure appears in the Progress Window the tape drive firmware update was not successful Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 243 Chapter 9 Updating Firmware Updating and Autoleveling Tape Drive Firmware 10 To initiate autoleveling see Initiating Tape Drive Firmware Autoleveling on page 245 Deleting Tape Drive If you installed a tape drive firmware image to override the library s Firmware Used in baseline image used for autoleveling you can delete it You cannot Autoleveling delete the library s baseline tape drive firmware images For more information see About Tape Drive Firmware Autoleveling on page 240 Note Deleting tape drive firmware for autoleveling only deletes the firmware and makes the library s baseline tape drive firmware available for autoleveling It does not initiate autoleveling or install firmware on the tape drives To initiate autoleveling see Initiating Tape Drive Firmware Autoleveling on page 245 You can only delete tape drive firmware on the Web client Web Client 1 Select Tools gt Drive Operations The Tools Drive Operations screen displays 2 Select Upload remove tape drive firmware for autoleveling and click Next The Tape Drive Firmware Autolevel screen displays The screen lists the vendor type interface type form factor an
170. dividuals who also use SKM for managing encryption keys Each SKM server provides a unique encryption key for each tape cartridge that is encrypted To read an encrypted tape in a library that is attached to an SKM server that is different than the server that originally provided the encryption key the encryption key from the originating i e source SKM server needs to be shared with the receiving i e destination SKM server The key or list of keys if there is more than one tape is exported from the source SKM server to a file which is sent to the destination recipient Each key contained in the file is encrypted using the public key of the destination SKM server The destination SKM server provides its public key to the source SKM server as part of an Encryption Certificate which the source SKM server uses to wrap encrypt the encryption keys for transport Upon arrival the file containing the wrapped encryption keys can only be unwrapped by the corresponding private key which resides on the destination SKM server and is never shared Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 203 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Performing Scalar Key Manager Functions Available on the Library Exporting Encryption Certificates The process is as follows 1 7 The destination administrator exports the Encryption Certificate that belongs to the destination SKM server The Encryption Certificate is saved as a file to a lo
171. e 121 Chapter 5 Advanced Reporting Using Advanced Reporting Reports e Type The chart type Select one of the following e Rollup default Displays the number of TapeAlerts for the combination of Grouping and Attributes you selected default e Trend Shows the occurrence of TapeAlerts over time e Grouping Specifies which drive s or tape cartridge s on which to base the report Choose one of the following e All default All tape drives and tape cartridges for which a TapeAlert was issued during the specified range e Selected Drive by Physical SN An individual tape drive Only tape drives which issued a TapeAlert during the specified range appear in the report e Selected Cartridge by Barcode An individual tape cartridge Only tape cartridges that were associated with a TapeAlert during the specified range appear in the report e Sorting Specifies how the data will be sorted Choose from the following e Alphabetical e Count ascending e Last Occurrence default 3 Click Next The report is generated and displays on the screen 122 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 5 Advanced Reporting Using Advanced Reporting Reports Using Advanced If you want to use the same configuration repeatedly you can save it as Reporting Templates a template You can save up to 20 templates for each type of advanced report You can only work with templates from the Web client
172. e IP address on the service port You can only change the subnet third octet of the IP address 192 168 xxx 1 The other sections must remain as they are You may choose a number from 1 to 255 You can only configure the service network from the operator panel Operator Panel 1 Select Tools gt Service Network Under Modify Subnet the three digit octet of the IP address is highlighted 2 Use the Up and Down buttons to scroll to the desired subnet and press Apply For more information on scrolling see Navigating and Editing on the Operator Panel on page 25 78 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Working With Local User Accounts and Passwords 3 Press OK 4 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Working With Local User Accounts and Passwords Using the Web Client Default Administrator Account Administrators can create and modify two types of local user accounts user and administrator These users have different library privilege levels and can access different things The Web client requires user accounts and user logins the operator panel does not You can configure the operator panel to run with logins required You can also configure the library to use Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP accounts This section covers e Using the Web Client Default Administrator Account on page 79 e Priv
173. e Progress Window to resolve any issues that occurred during the operation If a complete tape drive log could not be retrieved you may still be able to access a partial log If so a note will appear stating A complete tape drive log could not be retrieved but a partial log is Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 8 Getting Information About the Library Viewing Library Information on the Operator Panel available and may be saved for further analysis once the progress window is closed Viewing Library Information on the Operator Panel The operator panel provides several brief reports about the library Viewing Partition The operator panel provides an overview of partition information For Information each partition you can see the following information Online offline mode Control path tape drive location coordinates Number of tape drives Number of storage slots Number of I E station slots containing a tape cartridge assigned to the partition Operator Panel 1 Select Reports gt Partitions 2 If the library contains more than one partition use the Up and Down buttons to select a partition and press Select Viewing Tape Drive The operator panel provides an overview of tape drive information For Information each installed tape drive you can see the following information Online offline mode Partition to which the tape drive is assigned Whether the tape drive is the control p
174. e Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Note You can configure a control path failover drive if you have an Advanced Reporting license and HP LTO5 tape drives See Working with Control Path Failover CPF on page 113 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 67 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Adding or Upgrading Licensable Features Adding or Upgrading Licensable Features You can increase the functionality of your library by purchasing licenses for the following upgrades e Capacity on Demand COD e Advanced Reporting includes custom reports and logs and Control Path Failover CPF functionality e Encryption Key Management EKM For more information about these features see Licensable Features on page 12 A license key can be applied to only one library and is tied to the library s serial number If the license is not installed when you receive your library you will receive a License Key Certificate that contains an authorization code and instructions on how to obtain your license key from the Quantum Web site Once you install the license key on the library the feature becomes available About License Keys Details about license keys include e An authorization code to obtain a license key can be used one time only e A license key consists of 5 characters randomly selected from the following allowable characters a h j n p t v z 2 9 and the ampersand character Alpha characte
175. e are a number of informational screens and reports you can use to get information about the library This chapter covers Viewing Library InformationViewing System Information Viewing the Location of the Robot Viewing the Library Configuration Report Saving and E mailing the Library Configuration Record Viewing the Network Settings Report Viewing the Logged in Users Report Viewing the All Slots Report Viewing Saving and E mailing Library Logs Viewing Library Information on the Operator Panel Using Advanced Reporting Features Viewing the Open Source License Agreement Viewing the Copyright Statement Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 215 Chapter 8 Getting Information About the Library Viewing Library Information EE Viewing Library Information The About screen gives you a quick glance at the following library settings e Library type Scalar i40 or Scalar i80 e Library serial number e Copyright date e Library firmware version Web Client Select Reports gt About gt Scalar i40 i80 E Viewing System Information The System Information report contains information about the library On the operator panel the report provides e Physical library information serial number system control board SCB revision firmware version board support package BSP version date and time of last firmware update e Tape drives online offline mode f
176. e than one tape drive resided in that location during the selected range then the attribute values for all the tape drives that resided in that location are combined in the chart e All Drives by Physical SN Presents the sum total of the selected attribute for all drives according to the physical tape drive serial number e All Partitions Presents a comparison of all drives grouped by partition in the physical library e Selected Drive by Coordinate The report chart is based on an individual tape drive location in the library If more than one tape drive resided in that location during the selected range then the attribute values for all the tape drives that resided in that location are combined in the chart e Selected Drive by Physical SN The report chart is based on an individual tape drive identified by its physical drive serial number e Selected Partition The report chart is based on an individual partition in the physical library Note See Installed Tape Drive Location Coordinates on page 9 for an explanation of the location coordinates 3 Click Next The report is generated and displays on the screen Configuring the Media This report provides TapeAlert counts for various combinations of tape Integrity Analysis drives tape cartridges and TapeAlert flags You can use this report to Report help determine if a problem is due to a specific tape drive or tape cartridge 120 Quantum Scalar i4
177. eate a new one see Deleting Local User Accounts on the Web Client on page 83 Web Client 1 Select Setup gt User Management gt User Accounts The Setup Users screen displays Select a user account and click Modify The Modify User Account screen displays where User Name is the name of the local user account Enter your Admin password to verify you have privileges to modify the account Enter new password for selected user name Optionally type a new password Passwords are limited to 6 16 lower case alphanumeric characters and can include also include underscores _ periods hyphens asterisks and the at symbol For example pass_19 Confirm new password for selected user name Retype the password Select Privilege Optionally change privilege level Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Deleting Local User Accounts on the Web Client Enabling and Creating Passwords on the Operator Panel Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Working With Local User Accounts and Passwords 7 If the user account has user privileges and you want to modify partition access click Next The Modify User Account User Name screen displays where User Name is the name of the user account This screen lists all library partitions with the user s assigned partitions checked Modify any of the partition selections 9 Click Apply 10 Save the library configuration see Saving
178. eatures 00000 cee eee eee 2 Operator Panel Functions 0020000 ee eee 22 Web Client Screen Elements 0 00000 eee 29 Scalar i80 I E Slot Configuration 63 Fibre Channel Tape Drive Configurable Settings 65 Encryption Key Management Systems 175 Encryption Methods 0000 0 eee eee 185 Base Library 2 2 ee 277 Library Installed in a Desktop Kit 2 278 Tape Alert Flag Severity Codes 00 0005 285 Tape Drive Tape Alert Flag Descriptions 286 xvii Tables xviii Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Audience Document Organization Preface This manual introduces the Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 and discusses System operations Configuration Web and operator panel interface Installation and replacement Basic troubleshooting This manual is written for Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 operators system administrators and field service engineers Following is a brief description of chapter contents Chapter 1 Description provides a physical description of the library its components and major features Chapter 2 Unpacking the Library describes how to prepare a space and unpack the library Chapter 3 Understanding the User Interface describes the appearance and function of the operator panel and Web client Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide xix Pre
179. eb Client Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Logging In Note If you misplace the password for the default admin account contact Quantum Support For contact information see Getting More Information or Help on page xxv If passwords have not been set on the operator panel you do not need to log in and all operations are allowed to all users It is recommended that you set passwords on the operator panel see Enabling and Creating Passwords on the Operator Panel on page 83 If passwords have been set on the operator panel there are three possible user IDs admin user and service Log in as follows 1 At the login screen use the Up and Down buttons to select admin user or service Press Apply Enter the first digit of the password using the Up and Down buttons to scroll to the correct number then press Right to go to the next digit Enter the rest of the digits in the same way Note Only the digit you are currently modifying displays an actual number When you finish one digit and move to the next the completed digit displays as a cross hatch symbol 4 When finished entering all digits press Apply Note If you misplace the password for the operator panel logins you can clear operator panel passwords via the Web client see Resetting Passwords on the Operator Panel on page 87 1 Establish an Internet connection to the library by typing the library s IP address
180. eck box associated with the control path is grayed out For more information on setting the control path see Configuring Control Paths on page 66 Before modifying partitions verify that all tape drives are unloaded and that all cartridges are in their appropriate storage slot location For information on unloading tape drives see Unloading Tape Drives on page 161 You can modify partitions only on the Web client Web Client 1 Select Setup gt Partitions Select a partition and click Modify Modify any of the settings For a description of what each setting means see Manually Creating Partitions on page 52 4 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Deleting Partitions A partition can be deleted when it is no longer needed After a partition is deleted its resources tape drives and slots become unassigned and can be used to create new partitions or added to existing partitions Before deleting a partition unload cartridges from the tape drives within the partition and then export all cartridges from the partition Remove the cartridges from the I E station after exporting them For information on unloading tape drives see Unloading Tape Drives on page 161 For information on exporting cartridges see Exporting Tape Cartridges on page 158s You can also remove cartridges by releasing the magazine and removing them by hand see Releasing Magazines on Quantum Sc
181. ective 3 Assign the encryption certificate with which you will wrap encrypt the keys by selecting it from the Certificate Name Used For Export drop down list Choose the certificate that belongs to the server to which the keys will be imported Note The owner of that server should have sent you the certificate and you should have imported it see Sharing Encrypted Tape Cartridges on page 203 and Importing Encryption Certificates on page 205 The drop down list contains all of the encryption certificates that you have ever imported onto your SKM server indicated by the word imported in the list as well as the certificate belonging to your SKM server pair indicated by the word native in the list 4 Select which SKM encryption keys to export from the following options e Export Used Exports all the keys that have ever been used to encrypt tape cartridges on the library performing this export Also exports all keys that were imported onto the key server via a key import operation from any library Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 207 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Performing Scalar Key Manager Functions Available on the Library e Export Current Exports all the keys that were used to encrypt the tape cartridges that are currently in the library performing this export This includes storage slots I E stations and tape drives If a tape cartridge is no longer in
182. ed to automatically send e mail notifications to specified e mail addresses whenever an issue of a particular severity level occurs with one of its components The information in the e mail notification provides details about the issue and the library conditions at the time of the error Before you can configure e mail notifications you must configure the library s e mail account so that the library can send notifications to the designated recipients See Configuring the Library E Mail Account on page 75 for information on how to configure the e mail account The library supports a maximum of 20 e mail notification recipients including the default Quantum Support e mail notification See Creating E mail Notifications on page 72 for information on setting up additional e mail notifications If an e mail notification is no longer needed you can delete it For information on how to delete an e mail notification see Deleting E mail Notifications on page 74 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 71 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Working With E mail Notifications Creating E mail Notifications 72 There are three e mail notification filter levels e All Tickets Notifies e mail recipients of all tickets e High and Urgent tickets only Notifies e mail recipients of high severity and urgent tickets e Urgent tickets only Notifies e mail recipients of urgent tickets only The library comes wit
183. eds cleaning the library will perform the move operation and then automatically clean the tape drive with a cleaning cartridge before informing the host application that the move operation is complete Note The AutoClean or manual cleaning feature on the library assumes that any tape cartridge imported into a cleaning slot is a cleaning tape cartridge regardless of the label on the cartridge or type of cartridge In order for a cleaning cartridge to be recognized by the library as such it must be imported into the library cleaning slot s Application managed cleaning uses the barcode label to determine if a tape cartridge is for cleaning or data use Be sure to label and import cleaning cartridges appropriately See Chapter 11 Working With Cartridges and Barcodes and Valid Cleaning Cartridges on page 164 When a cleaning cartridge has expired the library issues a diagnostic ticket that tells you to export the expired tape from the library If more cleaning cartridges are present the next cleaning cartridge will be used for the next cleaning request If no more cleaning cartridges are available the library issues a diagnostic ticket informing you that the tape drive needs cleaning and that a cleaning cartridge needs to be imported see Importing Cleaning Cartridges on page 166 and Exporting Cleaning Cartridges on page 168 Enabling AutoClean To enable AutoClean all you need to do is configure at least one cleaning slot
184. ee Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 SNMP Enables or disables SNMP traffic to the library This setting is enabled by default Operator Panel 1 Select Setup gt System Settings gt SNMP 2 Select the setting you want to modify and press Modify 3 Use the Up and Down buttons to select Enabled or Disabled and press Apply 4 When finished making all changes press Exit 5 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 SMI S Allows you to enable or disable SMI S running on the library This setting is disabled by default Operator Panel 1 Select Setup gt System Settings gt SMI S 2 Press Modify 3 Use the Up and Down buttons to select Enabled or Disabled and press Apply 4 Make another selection or press Exit 5 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 100 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Configuring System Settings Power Save To help save power the operator panel goes dark after a period of inactivity on the operator panel meaning no buttons have been pressed The default period is 30 minutes You can set this period to 15 minutes 30 minutes 45 minutes 60 minutes or never To immediately restore the operator panel screen once it has gone dark press any of the four navigation buttons on the library The operator panel will restore when an
185. een and click Send Save the report Click Save A tgz file is created which can be saved Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Performing KMIP Key Manager Functions on the Library E Performing KMIP Key Manager Functions on the Library Viewing and Changing The Key Manager Status screen shows you which encryption key server the Active Key Server is currently active and allows you to change the active server When you change the active server it means that the next key server operation and all subsequent key server operations will be performed using the new active server until that server fails or the key server settings are changed Note This feature is currently only available with KMIP Key Manager 1 From the Web client select Tools gt EKM Management gt Server Status The Key Manager Status screen appears Figure 45 Key Manager Status A list of all your connected EKM servers displays The currently active server displays in bold green type with the word Active after it 2 To choose a different server to be the active server select that server s radio button and click Apply Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 213 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Performing KMIP Key Manager Functions on the Library 214 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide P Chapter 8 Getting Information About the Library Ther
186. en you exit Diagnostics your partitions return to the online offline status they were in previously e Only users with Admin level privileges can access Diagnostics e Only one user can be logged into Diagnostics at a time Entering Diagnostics disconnects all other Web client users with the same or lower privileges the operator panel user is not logged out but any attempted operation using partitions will fail Users will be unable to log in to the Web client and will get an error message stating that Diagnostics is in progress e You can only enter Diagnostics from the Web client Web Client 1 Select Tools gt Diagnostics A confirmation dialog displays alerting you that all other users will be logged out and library partitions will be taken offline 2 Click OK You are now in a page that looks much like the regular Home page but with different choices in the menu bars Also you will notice that all your partitions are offline Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 267 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Performing Library Diagnostics 3 Select the test you want to run from the menus Your choices include e Tape Drive Reset see Resetting a Tape Drive on page 268 for more information e Robotics Get Put Test see Robotics Get Put Test on page 269 for more information 4 To exit Diagnostics select Exit Resetting a Tape Drive The Drive Reset operation power cycles the tape drive while the tape
187. ent 1 Select Operations gt Release Magazine 2 Select a magazine and press Apply Note Only closed magazines are listed 3 Click OK to confirm The Progress Window displays The Progress Window contains information on the action elapsed time and status of the requested operation Do one of the following e If Success appears in the Progress Window the magazine was unlocked Click Close to close the Progress Window The operator panel displays the status Unlocking and then Idle e If Failure appears in the Progress Window the magazine did not unlock 4 Within 30 seconds pull outward on the magazine bezel handle to slide the magazine out as far as you wish or remove it completely Once you slide the magazine back into the slot all the way it locks again automatically If you do not open the magazine within 30 seconds it locks Releasing Magazines Use this method when the library is turned OFF If you use this method Manually when the library is turned ON you will receive a diagnostic ticket Caution If you use the manual method to remove magazine s when the library is turned ON you risk a mechanical collision between the magazine and the robotics that could seriously damage components 1 Insert an opened paperclip small screwdriver or other object 3 5 mm or less in diameter that will not break off into the access hole in the bottom of the magazine bezel see Figure 30 2 Use the tool to
188. er to make the vast storage space more manageable or because the storage space is dedicated to different servers drives or applications When the storage space is divided into smaller parts each part is configured with its own SCSI unique identifier or LUN Magazine A container for removable media storage used in tape libraries Media A material that stores data such as tapes in cartridges or optical disks Media ID A barcode number attached to a specific piece of media Media type A format size of media for example LTO Medium See Media Mixed media The ability of a library to simultaneously support multiple types of storage media N_Port Node Port It only has the capability to communicate through an F Port It is a port on a computer disk drive and so on through which the device does its Fibre Channel communication as a direct fabric attached port for use with the point to point or fabric topology It is identified by a world wide name NL_Port Node Loop Port It has the capability to communicate over both FC AL hubs and through F_Ports Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Glossary O Online A status for a component that indicates it is active and available for use OS Operating System A control program for a computer that allocates computer resources schedules tasks and provides the user with a way to access the resources P Partition An abstraction of an underlying physical library that may
189. eration severe trouble reading or writing which will be resolved by a retension cycle 25 Multi port W A redundant interface port on the tape Failure of one interface error on a primary port drive has failed interface port in a dual port configuration for example Fibre Channel Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 289 Appendix B Tape Alert Flag Descriptions Recommended Application Client No Flag Severity Message Probable Cause 26 Cooling fan W A tape drive cooling fan has failed Fan failure inside tape failure drive mechanism or tape drive enclosure 27 Power supply W A redundant power supply has failed Redundant power failure inside the tape drive enclosure Check supply unit failure the enclosure user s manual for inside the tape drive instructions on replacing the failed enclosure or rack power supply subsystem 28 Power W The tape drive power consumption is Power consumption consumption outside the specified range of the tape drive is outside specified range 29 Drive W Preventive maintenance of the tape The drive requires preventive drive is required Check the tape drive preventative maintenance user s manual for device specific maintenance not required preventive maintenance tasks or call the cleaning tape drive supplier help line 30 Hardware A C The tape drive has a hardware fault The drive has a 1 Eject the tape or magaz
190. eros AD server For instructions see Generating the Kerberos Service Keytab File on page 95 You must have administrator privileges to configure Kerberos You can only configure Kerberos on the Web client Web Client 1 Make sure that both the library and the Kerberos Active Directory server are set to the same time within 5 minutes Otherwise the authentication will fail It is recommended that you use Network Time Protocol NTP to synchronize the time between the library and the Kerberos server See Setting the Date and Time Using the Network Time Protocol on page 47 2 Select Setup gt User Management gt Remote Authentication The Setup Remote Authentication screen displays Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 93 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Working With LDAP User Accounts Remote Authentication 3 Under Authentication Type do one of the following e To enable Kerberos select LDAP with Kerberos and continue with Step 4 e To disable Kerberos select LDAP or Local Only and continue with Step 6 e To modify Kerberos configuration settings continue with Step 4 4 Fill the following Kerberos fields e Realm The Kerberos realm name typed in all uppercase letters Usually the realm name is the DNS domain name Example MYCOMPANY COM e KDC AD Server The key distribution center in other words the server on which Kerberos Active Directory is installed Example myc
191. erpret the data listed on the reports e The data for the reports is collected in log files When the log files reach their maximum size the oldest information is deleted as new information is added This may affect how much historical data you can access e The on screen reports contain a chart and a data table When the log files are large it would take an excessively long time to load all Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 117 Chapter 5 Advanced Reporting Using Advanced Reporting Reports Configuring the Drive Resource Utilization Report the historical data into the data table For this reason the table displays a maximum of 1000 rows of data beginning with the most recent even if more data is available The chart displays information for the entire range To view all of the data you need to save or e mail the data file See Saving and E mailing Advanced Reporting Data Files on page 125 The reports are built according to data in the log files not your current library configuration For this reason your library may contain tape drives or cartridges that do not show up in the report Similarly the report may contain tape drives and cartridges that no longer reside in the library Information about a tape drive cartridge or operation is not recorded in the Drive Resource Utilization log file until after a tape cartridge has been mounted loaded and unmounted unloaded from the tape drive
192. ertificate Import SKM 191 Tools EKM Communication Certificate 192 Checking and Installing TLS Certificates 198 Accessing the Encryption Partition Configuration Changing Encryption Method to Application Managed LME disabled sine est oles satan eaten Adder eid rida be 202 Changing Encryption Method back to LME enabled 203 Exporting Encryption Certificates 205 Importing Encryption Certificates 2 206 Exporting Encryption Keys 0 000 c eee eee 207 Importing Data Encryption Keys aaas 209 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Figure 44 Figure 45 Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50 Figure 51 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Tables Audit Log Screens s tate tetts hoe de dena oe we 212 Key Manager Status 0 0 e eee ee eee 213 Tools Update Library Firmware Screen 237 Front Panel LEDsS 0 0 00 e eee eee eee 258 System Control Board LEDs 0 0055 259 Fibre Channel Tape Drive LEDs 0 261 Power Supply LED 0 00000 eee eee eee 262 Barcode Label Orientation 00055 276 XV Tables xvi Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Table 9 Table 10 Table 11 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Tables Front Panel F
193. es over the drive head HP LTO 4 drives will be cleaned every 100 hours and HP LTO 5 and higher drives can be cleaned in specified longer intervals e If AutoClean is enabled for IBM drives the drives will continue to clean at intervals that are determined by the drive The selected cleaning interval does not apply to IBM drives Cleaning slots do not need to be configured if you clean tape drives manually For more information about manual tape drive cleaning see Manually Cleaning Tape Drives on page 170 In addition you do not need to configure cleaning slots if you use host based cleaning Cleaning slots are not visible to the host application To use host based cleaning configure zero cleaning slots in the library and set up your host application to manage the cleaning process See your host application documentation for more information Note If you decrease the number of cleaning slots from what is currently configured the extra slots become unassigned and available to use as storage slots in new or existing partitions For information on how to assign available storage slots see Manually Creating Partitions on page 52 and Modifying Partitions on page 55 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Configuring Cleaning Slots Note If the library contains zero import export I E station slots you will not be able to import or export cleaning cartridges See Configuring
194. ets on page 248 for more information Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 3 Understanding the User Interface Menu Trees Menu Trees The following menus organize operations and commands into logical groupings e The Setup menu consists of commands that users with administrator privileges can use to set up and configure various aspects of the library including partitions I E station slots cleaning slots control paths network settings drive settings users notifications date and time licenses library registration and e mail e The Operations Actions menu consists of commands that enable users to change the library s mode of operations import and export cartridges load and unload tape drives move media lock or unlock the I E station log out and shut the library down The menu is called Actions on the operator panel and Operations on the Web client e The Tools menu consists of commands that you can use to maintain your library such as viewing diagnostic tickets generating diagnostic logs identifying drives configuring the internal network saving and restoring the library configuration setting system and security settings and updating firmware and performing library diagnostics e The Reports menu provides various kinds of library information Administrators have access to all menu commands but users privileges are more limited Figure 12 lists the operator panel menus Figure 1
195. etup Wizard which walks you through the initial configuration of the library s basic operational settings Note Library initialization can take approximately 9 to 23 minutes for an i40 or 14 to 40 minutes for an i80 Do not interrupt the library during initialization The Setup Wizard on the operator panel displays when you first install your library It displays only once with the following exceptions it will also display after SCB replacement resetting factory defaults or downgrading library firmware When the Setup Wizard displays on the operator panel you must either complete the Setup Wizard or cancel out of it If you cancel you accept the library s default configuration see Default Configuration on page 38 You can modify the configuration at any time later using the Setup Wizard on the Web client or by using the Setup menu options from the operator panel or Web client Operator Panel The Setup Wizard on the operator panel is covered in detail in the Scalar 140 and Scalar 180 Quick Start Guide Web Client To access the Setup Wizard click Setup gt Setup Wizard Work through several screens that enable you to add licenses set date time and time zone configure cleaning slots configure I E station slots and auto create partitions Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 37 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Default Configuration Default Configuration The library comes with a default conf
196. ew information about the tape drive e In the library map click the chassis number 0 below the tape drives to view information about the chassis e Click Show Barcodes to display the barcodes for all imported cartridges 220 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 8 Getting Information About the Library Viewing the Library Configuration Report e By default the Library Configuration Report displays the coordinates for all licensed slots that are assigned to a partition To view all library slot coordinates click Show ALL coordinates e To print the report click the Print icon in the upper right of the screen Clicking on a resource tape drive slot partition or chassis brings up a detailed window containing the following information e Tape Drives The following information is provided for each installed tape drive e Fibre Channel tape drive interface type tape drive type state ready not ready status online offline assigned partition name location coordinates media barcode if media is in slot No_Label means unreadable barcode media type if media is in the slot element address vendor model form factor half height or full height physical SN logical SN world wide node name WWNN world wide port name WWPN loop ID requested topology requested speed actual topology actual speed maximum speed tape drive firmware level whether the tape drive is the control
197. eys when needed If you try to generate data encryption keys on an SKM server that already has sufficient unused data encryption keys then it will not create more You will receive a message to that effect on the library remote Web client Note Each library that you connect to an SKM server requires its own set of data encryption keys Each library only pulls data encryption keys from the set that belongs to it This means that an SKM server may contain several distinct sets of data encryption keys When the data encryption keys for one library have all been used then more keys must be generated You can generate data encryption keys in the following ways e Generating Data Encryption Keys at Initial Setup e Generating Data Encryption Keys When 80 Depleted e Generating Data Encryption Keys When 100 Depleted e Manually Generating Data Encryption Keys Generating Data Encryption Keys at Initial Setup At initial setup the library triggers each SKM server to generate a set of data encryption keys The process is described in Step 7 Configure Partitions for Library Managed Encryption on page 183 Generating Data Encryption Keys When 80 Depleted When an SKM server has used 80 percent of the data encryption keys assigned to a particular library that library attempts to automatically generate data encryption keys on the SKM server Both SKM servers must be running and operational in order for automatic key generation to succeed
198. face Chapter 4 Configuring the Library provides instruction and description for all the configurable features of the library Chapter 5 Advanced Reporting describes the features available with the Advanced Reporting license Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations explains how to run the library from the operator panel and Web client Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management describes the features available with the Encryption Key Management EKM license Chapter 8 Getting Information About the Library describes all of the reporting features on the library Chapter 9 Updating Firmware describes how to upgrade library firmware and install and autolevel tape drive firmware Chapter 10 Troubleshooting describes the library s troubleshooting tools including diagnostic tickets LEDs and tests Chapter 11 Working With Cartridges and Barcodes provides basic information about how to label and care for media used in the library Appendix A Specifications provides physical environmental power and other specifications about the library tape drives and media Appendix B Tape Alert Flag Descriptions lists all the Tape Alerts you may encounter in a diagnostic ticket Appendix C Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment provides information on disposing and recycling The document concludes with a glossary and index Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Preface Nota
199. file click Save Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 125 Chapter 5 Advanced Reporting Working with the Media Security Log 4 To e mail the report data as a csv file type the name of a recipient in the empty field next to the E mail button then click E mail Figure 21 Saving and E mailing the Report Data Retrieve the report data file Save recipient company com Working with the Media Security Log Note You must have an Advanced Reporting license to use this feature Media removal is detected by the library when it performs an inventory at boot up for example The media security log lists media that have been removed from the library You can configure the library to collect any or all of the following media removal events for the log e Unexpected Removal Detection After Power up and Reboot Only e Unexpected Removal Detection During Library Operation e Expected Removal Detection From IE Slots During Library Operation Unexpected removal refers to tape cartridges that were removed from the library without being exported properly via the I E station Expected removal refers to tape cartridges that were exported properly via the I E station By default all the options are disabled and the library collects nothing You must enable at least one of the options for the library to begin collecting data The log only lists media that is completely removed from the library It does no
200. firmware version required for KMIP is i4 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 179 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Scalar Key Manager SKM on the Library Step 2 Install the EKM License Key on the Library Step 3 Prepare Partitions for Library Managed Encryption Step 4 Configure Encryption Settings and Key Server Addresses 180 If your EKM license key is not already installed on the library install it now see Adding or Upgrading Licensable Features on page 68 For each partition on which you want to enable Library Managed Encryption do the following 1 Make sure the partition contains encryption supported and encryption capable tape drives and media Note the following e SKM partitions must contain only LTO 4 LTO 5 and or LTO 6 tape drives SKM media must have valid barcode labels affixed SKM does not support the use of unlabeled media e KMIP partitions must contain only LTO 4 LTO 5 and or LTO 6 tape drives 2 Unload tape cartridges from all tape drives in the partitions on which you are configuring EKM Make sure to complete the above steps before proceeding Note You cannot edit the encryption system configuration settings when any partition is enabled for Library Managed Encryption If this happens go to Setup gt Encryption gt Partition Configuration change all EKM partition settings from LME enabled to LME disabled Then make your changes to the system
201. ge 55 You can select the number of partitions to create The maximum number of partitions that you can create is equal to the number of tape drives in the library that are not currently assigned to a partition The minimum number of partitions you can create automatically is the number of unique tape drives based on interface type Fibre Channel or SAS and media generation LTO 4 LTO 5 LTO 6 not currently assigned to a partition For example if your library contains two tape drives a Fibre Channel HP LTO 4 and a Fibre Channel HP LTO 5 two partitions is the minimum because the tape drive generations are different You cannot mix tape drive interface types or media generations within a partition when creating partitions automatically If you wish to do so you must create the partition manually see Manually Creating Partitions on page 52 When the library automatically creates partitions it assigns the first tape drive in the partition as the control path You can change the control path at any time See Configuring Control Paths on page 66 more information Before automatically creating partitions verify that all tape drives are unloaded and that all cartridges are in their appropriate storage slots For information on unloading tape drives see Unloading Tape Drives on page 161 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 51 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Working With Partitions Operator Panel 1 Select
202. gned to more than one partition select the partition in which the tape drive s you want to reset are located Select Unassigned if the tape drive s you want to reset are not assigned to a partition Click Next 4 Select the tape drive s you want to reset Click Apply 6 The test runs When complete a success or failure message displays Robotics Get Put Test The Get Put Test requires the robot to remove one tape cartridge from the top IE station slot and then put the tape cartridge back into the same slot To run this test you must insert a tape into the library s top uppermost I E station slot You can only perform this test from the Web client by entering Diagnostics see Performing Library Diagnostics on page 267 Web Client 1 Install a scratch tape in the top I E station slot 2 If manual cartridge assignment is enabled assign the scratch tape to the System partition 3 Enter Diagnostics Tools gt Diagnostics then click OK to take partitions offline and log out all other users of the same or lower privileges 4 Select Robotics gt Robotics Get Put Test Click Apply 6 The test runs When complete a success or failure message displays Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 269 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Resetting Factory Defaults Resetting Factory Defaults Resetting factory defaults restores the library s default configuration see Default Configuration on p
203. h one default e mail notification recipient for Quantum Support The filter level and e mail address of the default technical support notification cannot be modified but the notification can be enabled or disabled It is disabled by default Users with administrator privileges can configure the library e mail account and e mail notifications Users with user privileges can receive e mail notifications but they cannot configure the library e mail account or e mail notifications You can view and configure e mail notifications from the Web client only Administrators can create e mail notifications The library supports a maximum of 20 e mail notification recipients including the default support e mail notification Each e mail notification recipient must have a unique e mail address To set e mail notifications you need to provide the e mail address and filter level setting for the recipient For more information on filter levels see Working With E mail Notifications on page 71 Each e mail notification includes an optional Comments text box you can use to enter important system configuration details such as the network environment or third party software applications that interface with the library Such information can help technical support personnel to troubleshoot the library You can create e mail notifications on the Web client only Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Working
204. hannel drives Note The Actual Topology and Speed can take up to two minutes to be negotiated and returned from a Fibre Channel drive The values will be unknown until negotiated Fibre Channel Drives Total Number of Drives 2 libray_a o2 Reay nes Pointto Point v Awo PointtoPoint amp Gbis 8Gb s 50030803 88B90004 Halt Heian i LTO 5 ar 7 library_a or Rey E PoitioPoin v Auo PointtoPoint bis amp 6bis 500308c3 88B90000 b For the appropriate partition select the Requested Topology of Point to Point from the drop down menu c Click Apply 114 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 5 Advanced Reporting Working with Control Path Failover CPF 2 Select Setup gt Control Path The Control Path screen displays for that partition Figure 16 Setup Control Path Screen Control Path library_a Online Select a tape drive to host the library control path for this partition If an HP LTO 5 FC tape drive is selected as the control path drive you may select another HP LTO 5 FC tape drive to use as the control path failover drive Note To disable a control path or failover drive click the current selection to deselect it or make a different selection 3 Select the Failover drive by clicking the Failover option 4 Click Apply You can also manually force a failover see Forcing CPF on page 115 Forcing CPF Web Client
205. he library is notified by a tape drive when cleaning is required and the library automatically cleans the tape drive using a cartridge from a cleaning slot You can configure cleaning slots during the initial library configuration or at any time in the future as long as there are licensed slots available in the library If no licensed slots are available you must purchase additional slots or modify or delete a partition to free existing slots see Working With Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 59 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Configuring Cleaning Slots 60 Partitions on page 49 Cleaning slots are not assigned to specific partitions They are shared by all partitions within a library A maximum of four cleaning slots can be configured Zero cleaning slots are configured by default The drive cleaning interval or number of motion hours between drive cleanings can also be configured If no interval is set e The drive will not be cleaned in regular intervals e The drive will be cleaned when the drive issues a Tape Alert indicating the drive needs to be cleaned e The drive will be cleaned when a manual cleaning is performed Automatic Cleaning intervals vary based on the manufacturer of the drive e If AutoClean is enabled for HP drives you must specify a cleaning interval to ensure the drives are cleaned Cleaning intervals are specified in motion hours which is the time in hours that the tape mov
206. he Web client select Setup gt Encryption gt Partition Configuration to view and change the encryption settings of partitions See Step 7 Configure Partitions for Library Managed Encryption on page 183 for more details Installing TLS Certificates on the Library If you are running SKM or a KMIP key manager Transport Layer Security TLS communication certificates with valid dates must be installed on the library in order for the library to communicate securely with attached EKM servers At any time you may install a new set of TLS certificates to overwrite the existing set The new TLS certificates must all be valid or the overwrite will not occur and the existing certificates will remain in place Take one the following actions according to which encryption system you are using Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 189 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Installing TLS Certificates on the Library Encryption System Action Scalar Key Manager SKM If you purchased your library with firmware version i2 or higher the library came with TLS certificates pre installed You can check the Web client to see whether TLS certificates are installed see Checking for Current Certificates on page 34 If valid TLS certificates are currently installed you do not need to do anything However if you wish you may install your own certificates to replace the existing certificates see Installing Your O
207. he effective tape cartridge barcode label length including any media ID may be limited to a maximum of 12 characters e Background reflection greater than 25 percent e Print contrast greater than 75 percent e Ratio greater than 2 2 e Module minimum 254 mm 10 mil e Print tolerance 57 mm e Length of the rest zones 5 25 mm 0 25 mm e No black marks should be present in the intermediate spaces or rest zones e No white areas should be present on the bars Supported Barcode Formats Quantum supplies industry standard LTO barcode labels with a length of 6 2 corresponding to the Standard Six and Plus Six formats listed below For advanced uses your Quantum library supports label lengths of up to 15 characters allowing you to create custom labels Refer to Barcode Label Requirements on page 273 for label details The library supports the following tape cartridge barcode formats e Standard Six Six character barcode number with or without a one or two character media ID for example XXXXXX or XXXXXXL4 Only the six character barcode is reported to the host e Plus Six Six character barcode number followed by a media ID for example XXXXXXL3 Six character barcode and media ID are reported to the host 274 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 11 Working With Cartridges and Barcodes Installing Barcode Labels e Extended Five to 15 characters total including a bar
208. ibrary configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Deleting a Recipient Web Client 1 Select Setup gt Notifications gt Advanced Reporting gt Receiver Addresses The Setup Advanced Reporting Receiver Addresses screen displays 2 Select a recipient and click Delete 3 On the Confirmation window click OK Save the library configuration For instructions on how to save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 134 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide P Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations This chapter explains how to access and operate your library Most of the library functions described here can be found on the Operations menu of the Web client or the Actions menu of the operator panel This chapter covers Logging In Logging Out Shutting Down Restarting Turning Off and Removing Power Emergency Power off Procedure Unlocking and Opening the I E Station Releasing Magazines Performing Media Operations Cleaning Tape Drives Taking a Tape Drive Online or Offline Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 135 Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Logging In Logging In Simultaneous Logins Logging in for the First Time 136 All users service users and administrators must log in to the library to perform library functions or view library operations Exception If p
209. icate also called the CA certificate or Certificate Authority Certificate Client Certificate Admin Certificate KMIP Key Managers Root Certificate also called the CA certificate or Certificate Authority Certificate Client Certificate These files must be in the proper format as follows If any of the following requirements is not met none of the certificates will be imported The Root Certificate must be 2048 bits and be in PEM format e Admin and Client certificates must be in pkcs12 912 format with a separate certificate and private key contained in each e Admin and Client certificates must be 1024 2048 or 4096 bits Note SKM attached Scalar libraries support communication certificate key lengths of 1024 bits Communication certificates larger than 1024 bits such as 2048 and 4096 bit key lengths are supported by the i40 i80 i6 and later release Refer to the Scalar library release notes or contact Quantum technical support for additional information and availability of required library firmware Note however that the use of communication certificates with key bit lengths larger than 1024 bits will affect library performance with respect to encryption key retrieval times and encryption key generation import and export operations While certificate key lengths of 2048 bits slightly slow operations in single and multi library attached SKM server environments the use of communication certif
210. icates with a key length of 4096 bits should be avoided in SKM configuration environments where multiple Scalar tape libraries are attached to a single SKM server pair e Admin and Client certificates must be signed by the Root Certificate 194 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Installing TLS Certificates on the Library e Certificates must have the Organization name O set in the Issuer and Subject information e The Admin certificate must have its Organizational Unit name OU set as akm_admin in its Subject Information e The same Root certificate must be installed on the SKM servers and the library e All the certificates have a valid validity period according to the library s date and time settings To Install Your Own Certificates 1 Ensure that the date on both SKM servers and the library are set to the current date Incorrect date settings may interfere with the TLS certificates and cause the library to stop communicating with the SKM servers 2 Place the TLS certificate files in a known location on your computer 3 From the Tools menu select EKM Management gt Import Communication Certificates The Tools EKM Communication Certificate Import screen opens see Figure 36 on page 198 At the top of the page the primary and secondary key server status is displayed If the status is Not Available it means there is no communication with the server
211. id possible conflicts with the other partitions Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Performing Media Operations You can export cartridges using either the operator panel or the Web client Operator Panel 1 Select Actions gt I E gt Export Tape 2 If more than one partition exists use the Up and Down buttons select the partition that contains the source cartridge you want to export then press Select 3 Alist of all the tape cartridges in storage slots in the selected partition displays Use the Up and Down buttons to select a tape cartridge for export You may also select ALL to export all cartridges however the ALL option is only available if there are enough empty slots in the I E station to accommodate all the cartridges in the selected partition 4 Press Export 5 When the screen displays confirmation that the export completed press OK 6 Once the operation completes you may open the I E station and remove the cartridges see Unlocking and Opening the I E Station on page 145 Web Client 1 Select Operations gt Media gt Export 2 If more than one partition exists select the partition that contains the source cartridge you want to export 3 Click Next The Export Media Partition Mode screen displays where Partitionis the name of the partition and Mode is the current mode online or offline of the partition 4 Note the number of empt
212. ied to the front of a cartridge Peel off the label and place it on the cartridge The label must be placed entirely within the recessed area on the cartridge Verify that the label is oriented so that the numbers appear above the barcode see Figure 51 on page 276 Place the barcode label as level as possible in the provided space for the label If the label is not placed horizontally level barcode label scan read operations may encounter difficulties reading the label Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 275 Chapter 11 Working With Cartridges and Barcodes Installing Barcode Labels The cartridge cannot have any stickers or labels attached to the top or bottom because if the labels come loose they can get caught in the tape drives or become unreadable by the scanner Caution Do not place a barcode label or any labels on the top or bottom of a cartridge Doing so can cause the tape cartridge and tape drive operations to fail Figure 51 Barcode Label Orientation 276 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide mM B E Appendix A i Specifications Physical Specifications Table 8 Base Library Scalar i40 Scalar i80 Height 5 2 in 132 mm 10 4 in 264 mm Width excluding rack ears 17 5 in 445 mm 17 5 445 mm Depth from library front bezel to back 31 2 in 793 mm 31 2 in 793 mm of library excluding drive sleds Weight one power supply no
213. ient Operator Panel Select Setup gt Network Configuration Web Client Select Setup gt Network Management gt Network The library can support both IPv4 and IPv6 network settings at the same time For more details see the bullets below Caution If you change the IP address on your library make sure to change it on any host applications that access the library Note Be sure to add your library s IP address to the list of trusted allowed sites on your library supported browser so the Web client pages automatically refresh e IPv4 Addresses The library always supports IPv4 network settings The library can support either a DHCP obtained or a static IPv4 address IPv4 addresses must be entered in dot notation for example 192 168 0 1 They are limited to numeric characters and do not allow values exceeding 255 for dot separated values e IPv6 Addresses IPv6 is disabled by default and can only be enabled disabled via the operator panel Once enabled you must use the Web client to modify the address Unlike IPv4 the library can support both DHCP obtained and static IPv6 addresses at the same time Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Default Gateway Subnet Mask Network Prefix and DNS Addresses Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Configuring Network Settings IPv6 addresses must be entered in the proper notation IPv6 address can be entered in the most common notatio
214. iguration which you can modify at any time The default configuration is as follows Feature Default Configuration Library host name library Network settings Number of partitions IPv4 DHCP enabled IPv6 disabled Equal to the number of unique tape drives based on interface type Fibre Channel or SAS and drive generation LTO 4 LTO 5 LTO 6 not currently assigned to a partition Storage slots are divided equally among the partitions Number of I E station slots 5 Number of cleaning slots 0 Configuring Network Settings The operator panel Setup Wizard allows you to configure network settings that allow remote access to the library from the Web client At a minimum you must initially configure the network IP address from the operator panel After the initial configuration you can modify the network settings from either the operator panel or the Web client 38 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Configuring Network Settings Note Changing the network settings may interrupt the library connection and library communication Your current browser session may become invalid If this happens you must close your browser and then restart it to reconnect to the library with your new configuration settings Note Make sure that the library is connected to the network before modifying network settings If the Ethernet cable i
215. ile See Configuring the Library E Mail Account on page 75 for more information The Diagnostic Tickets Log records all diagnostic tickets issued by the library The log provides the following information Num ticket number to provide a consecutive listing of tickets in the order issued the first ticket issued is assigned number 1 the second ticket 2 and so on State open unopened closed Priority low high urgent Created date the ticket was first issued Last Updated date the ticket was last issued Cause Code the number assigned to the fault and which displays in the Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 227 Chapter 8 Getting Information About the Library Viewing Saving and E mailing Library Logs Media Security Log with Advanced Reporting License Media Usage Log with Advanced Reporting License full ticket name for example DTO31 I E Unlock Warning has cause code 31 Description and Details Web Client 1 Select Reports gt Log Viewer 2 Select Diagnostic Tickets Log and press Next The report displays in a new window for viewing 3 You can save or e mail the report following the on screen instructions Note If you want to e mail the log file to a recipient type the recipient s name in the text box next to the E mail button and then click the E mail button You must have your e mail account configured in order to e mail a log file See Configuring the Library E
216. ilege Levels on page 80 e Creating Local User Accounts on the Web Client on page 81 e Modifying Local User Accounts on the Web Client on page 82 e Deleting Local User Accounts on the Web Client on page 83 e Enabling and Creating Passwords on the Operator Panel on page 83 e Disabling Passwords on the Operator Panel on page 86 e Resetting Passwords on the Operator Panel on page 87 You must have administrator privileges to create modify and delete local user accounts The library ships with a default administrator account for use on the Web client The default administrator account has the following settings e User name admin e Password password Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 79 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Working With Local User Accounts and Passwords Privilege Levels 80 The first time you access the library via the Web client when you see the Login screen type admin in the User name text box and type password in the Password text box As soon as you complete the initial library setup you should change the password on the default administrator account For information on changing passwords see Modifying Local User Accounts on the Web Client on page 82 Note You cannot delete the default administrator account or modify the user name You can however change the password Note If you misplace the password for the default administrator account
217. in the library For information on configuring cleaning slots see Configuring Cleaning Slots on page 59 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 165 Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Cleaning Tape Drives Importing Cleaning Cartridges When AutoClean is enabled at least one cleaning slot has been configured you can import cleaning cartridges from the I E station to designated cleaning slots For information on configuring cleaning slots see Configuring Cleaning Slots on page 59 When manual cartridge assignment is enabled the default setting you cannot import cartridges until you have assigned them to a specific partition or to the System partition Cleaning cartridges should always be assigned to the System partition Assigning cleaning cartridges to the System partition makes them available to all partitions in the library For more information about manual cartridge assignment see Manual Cartridge Assignment on page 99 You must have access to the library s I E station and the operator panel to import cleaning cartridges Caution Some host applications may fail import export operations when the I E station contains cartridges that are assigned to another partition Move cartridges from the I E station as soon as possible to avoid possible conflicts with the other partitions Note If your library has zero I E station slots you cannot import or export cleaning media See Configur
218. in to the library 224 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 8 Getting Information About the Library Viewing the All Slots Report The report contains the following information about each user User Name User name of logged in user Privilege Privilege level of the logged in user Admin for administrator User for user Login Date Time Date and time the user logged into the library Last Activity Date Time Date and time when the user last logged into the library Login Location IP address or host name of the system used to access the library User Interface User interface used to access the system Web Client or Operator Panel Web Client Select Reports gt Logged in Users The report displays in a new window Viewing the All Slots Report The All Slots report contains information on all storage import export I E station and tape drive slots that are currently assigned to one or more partitions The report contains the following information about each slot Slot Type I E station storage cleaning or tape drive slot Barcode Barcode number of the cartridge installed in the slot No barcode number means the slot is empty No_Label means the barcode is unreadable Partition Partition that owns the slot I E station slots are shared by all partitions Location Location coordinates of the slot Element Address Element address of the slo
219. ine hardware fault that 2 Reset the drive FEAU SERRE f recover 3 Restart the operation 31 Hardware B C The tape drive has a hardware fault The drive has a 1 Turn the tape drive off and then on hardware fault that is again not read write related 2 Restart the operation ea eae POWER cycle to recover 3 If the problem persists call the tape drive supplier help line 32 Primary W The tape drive has a problem with the The drive has interface host interface identified an interface 1 Check the cables and cable fault connections 2 Restart the operation 290 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Appendix B Tape Alert Flag Descriptions Recommended Application Client No Flag Severity Message Probable Cause 33 Eject media C The operation has failed Error recovery action 1 Eject the tape or magazine 2 Insert the tape or magazine again 3 Restart the operation 34 Microcode W The microcode update has failed Microcode update update fail because you have tried to use the failed incorrect microcode for this tape drive Obtain the correct microcode and try again 35 Drive humidity W Environmental conditions inside the Drive humidity limits tape drive are outside the specified exceeded humidity range 36 Drive W Environmental conditions inside the Cooling problem temperature tape drive are outside the specified temperature range 37 Drive voltage W The voltage supply to the tape drive is Drive
220. ing I E Station Slots on page 62 Note Cleaning cartridges like all other cartridges used in the library must have a valid readable barcode label properly installed see Supported Barcode Formats on page 274 and Installing Barcode Labels on page 275 The process for importing cleaning cartridges includes the following steps Inserting and Assigning Cartridges 1 Verify that there is an available empty slot that is not assigned to a partition If needed free up access by modifying a partition see Modifying Partitions on page 55 2 Go to the front of the library and insert the cleaning cartridge s into the I E station Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Cleaning Tape Drives 3 Close the IE station 4 If manual cartridge assignment is enabled the I E Assign screen displays on the operator panel If manual cartridge assignment is enabled select the System partition 5 Press Apply 6 Continue using one of these options e Importing Cleaning Cartridges via the Operator Panel on page 167 e Importing Cleaning Cartridges via the Web Client on page 167 Importing Cleaning Cartridges via the Operator Panel 1 Select Actions gt I E gt Import Cleaning Tape A list of all the cleaning cartridges present in the I E station displays 2 If more than one cleaning cartridge is present in the I E station use the Up and Down buttons to select a cle
221. ing Information About the Library Viewing Saving and E mailing Library Logs 230 Tape drive log files adhere to the following naming convention UDS_ID_SN DMP where ID identifies the tape drive coordinate location within the library and SN identifies the tape drive serial number Web Client 1 2 Select Tools gt Drive Operations Select Retrieve tape drive log and click Next If your library contains multiple tape drive interface types select the interface type of the tape drive from which you want to retrieve logs and click Next The Retrieve Drive Log screen displays This screen lists the available tape drives Select a tape drive from which you want to retrieve logs and click Next Note If there is more than one page of tape drives use the Page 1 of x arrows to view the additional tape drives Note Bold column headings in the table can be sorted For example selecting the Location column heading will sort by location coordinates Click Apply A dialog displays asking you to confirm you want to take the partition offline Click OK The Progress Window displays displaying information on the action elapsed time and status of the operation If the Progress Window displays a completed message you can close the window and save the file to your computer If the screen displays a failure message the tape drive log was not successfully retrieved Follow the instructions listed in th
222. ing a media identification of C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 CU etc will be considered cleaning cartridges and will be tracked and treated as if the media label contained the prefix CLN or CLNU Note While the library does not require cleaning tapes to be labeled with CLN or CLNU in order to perform cleaning operations cleaning operations performed by an application may require cleaning tapes to be labeled appropriately in order to be recognized as such by the application Refer to your cleaning application documentation for more information Cleaning cartridges like all other cartridges imported into the library must have a unique external barcode label that is machine readable See Supported Barcode Formats on page 274 and Installing Barcode Labels on page 275 for more information Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Cleaning Tape Drives About AutoClean Configuring one or more dedicated cleaning slots automatically enables AutoClean see Configuring Cleaning Slots on page 59 Cleaning cartridges are stored in designated cleaning slots When a tape drive needs cleaning it notifies the library and the library automatically cleans the tape drive using a cartridge loaded in a cleaning slot Automatic cleaning is integrated into routine library operations For example if the host application requests the library to move a tape cartridge and the tape drive performing the operation ne
223. ings on page 38 for the proper format of IPv4 and IPv6 addresses e After you apply NTP settings system clock synchronization may take several minutes e Enter one or more valid NTP server IP addresses or host names if DNS is configured in the NTP servers text boxes Using two NTP servers can cause incorrect time calculations You should use either one NTP server or three but not exactly two You can only enable and configure NTP on the Web client Web Client 1 Select Setup gt Date amp Time 2 Refer to the library Web client online help for detailed instructions To view the help click the Help icon in the upper right corner of the screen ED Setting the Time Zone To select your time zone from a list disable Use Custom Time Zone setting and select your time zone from the list If your time zone does not appear on the list or if you want more control over your time settings enable Use Custom Time Zone and set a Universal Coordinated Time UTC offset You can only set the time zone via the Web client 48 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Setting Daylight Saving Time Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Working With Partitions Web Client 1 Select Setup gt Date amp Time 2 Refer to the library Web client online help for detailed instructions To view the help click the Help icon in the upper right corner of the screen SB If you selected your time zone from the drop down li
224. ion about the tape drives You cannot configure SAS tape drive settings A SAS tape drive s SAS address is automatically and uniquely generated based on a unique World Wide Name WWN that the drive receives when it is configured You can view SAS tape drive settings but not change them on the Web client 64 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Configuring Tape Drive Parameters Note If the affected partition is online it will be taken offline before the parameters are set and brought back online after they are set Table 5 Fibre Channel Tape 7 Drive Configurable Settings Setting Description Loop ID A unique loop ID is selected by default for all FC tape drives installed in the library For example the tape drive installed in the top drive bay is assigned a default loop ID of 61 The tape drive installed in the bottom drive bay is assigned a default loop ID of 63 If you change the default loop IDs make sure each FC tape drive with a topology setting of Auto LN Loop L or Auto NL has a unique loop ID Requested Topology The requested topology connection mode can be set to one of the following e Auto LN Auto configure trying L Port first e Loop L Force L Port e Point to Point Force N Port e Auto NL Auto configure trying N Port first default Requested Speed The requested interface speed can be set to Aut
225. ique tape drive installed in the library based on interface type Fibre Channel or SAS media generation LTO 4 LTO 5 LTO 6 and vendor type IBM or HP e Partition names are limited to 12 lower case alphanumeric characters and underscores _ e The maximum number of partitions that can be created is equal to the number of tape drives in the library 50 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Working With Partitions e The minimum number of partitions is one the minimum may be higher when automatically creating partitions see Automatically Creating Partitions on page 51 for details e Import export I E station slots are shared between all partitions Partitions take temporary ownership of I E station slots performing certain operations such as importing and exporting cartridges Automatically Creating Automatic partitioning assigns available library resources Partitions proportionately among the partitions grouping tape drives according to their interface type Fibre Channel or SAS media generation LTO 4 LTO 5 LTO 6 and vendor type IBM or HP The library must contain at least one unassigned tape drive and one unassigned slot to automatically create a partition If no unassigned tape drives or slots exist you must modify or delete one or more partitions to free up resources For more information see Modifying Partitions on page 55 and Deleting Partitions on pa
226. irmware version model physical serial number logical serial number e Robot firmware versions XY control picker camera On the Web client the report provides e Date amp Time Current date time and time zone settings e Physical Library Host name IPv4 address serial number firmware version of the physical library IPv6 addresses if IPv6 support is enabled board support package BSP level and the date the firmware was last updated 216 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 8 Getting Information About the Library Viewing the Location of the Robot e Encryption this section displays only if encryption key management is licensed and configured on the library Key server type encryption software version SSL connection enabled disabled primary host primary key server IP address or host name primary key server port number primary key server serial number secondary host secondary key server IP address or host name secondary key server port number secondary key server serial number e Library Partitions Name serial number control path online offline status encryption method encryption type number of storage slots number of media and number of tape drives configured for each partition e Drives Location coordinates vendor model type serial number physical serial number P SN logical serial number L SN firmware level and encryption method Operator Panel
227. is available only if DHCP is disabled Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 41 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Configuring SNMP Settings Operator Panel 1 Select Setup gt Network Configuration 2 Modify the fields using the method described in Navigating and Editing on the Operator Panel on page 25 Web Client Select Setup gt Network Management gt Network Configuring SNMP Settings Registering External Management Applications 42 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is a light weight protocol designed for remote management and monitoring of infrastructure devices The library provides SNMP support so an external management application can be configured to receive library SNMP information The library supports SNMP by publishing a Management Information Base MIB that can be queried to obtain the status of the library and many of its individual components SNMP information can be obtained from the library using SNMP Traps and GET queries For more information about SNMP see the Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 Basic SNMP Reference Guide 6 667 73 xx For information on integrating MIBs with an SNMP management application contact your network management application vendor Administrators can register transport protocols IP addresses and port numbers of external management applications to enable them to receive SNMP traps from the library By default the library ignores all SNMP SET
228. issuer C US S CA L SAN JOSE O QUANTUM OU MFG CN QKM CA pon Segondanlac3141FD4627D May 1 17 45 39 2019 cil vatia Subject C US S CA L SAN JOSE O QUANTUM OU MFG CN QKM CA Spal T EEA Issuer C US S CA L SAN JOSE O QUANTUM OU MFG CN QKM CA Sanar May 1 19 01 08 2019 G Subject cae L SAN JOSE O QUANTUM OU QKM CN QKM TLS Server Valid At the top of the page the primary and secondary key server status is displayed If the status is Not Available it means there is no communication with the server The most likely causes are that the server is down not connected or not configured correctly on the 192 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Installing Your Own TLS Certificates on the Library Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Installing TLS Certificates on the Library library or that no TLS certificates are installed or the TLS certificates are invalid or expired At the bottom of the page a message tells you whether TLS certificates are currently installed If certificates are installed a table appears below the message containing information about the installed certificates From the Select the Certificate Type to install drop down list select SKM Select the Use the Quantum Certificate Bundle checkbox Click the Browse button next to the Quantum Communication Certificate Bundle File field and locate the TLS certificate file Click Open 8 Click Apply 9 Verify that the TLS certificates
229. ists 58 Microcode W The tape drive has reset itself due to a Microcode bug failure detected microcode fault If problem persists call the supplier help line 59 WORM W The tape drive has detected an Someone has medium inconsistency during the WORM tampered with the integrity check medium integrity checks Someone may WORM medium failed have tampered with the cartridge 60 WORM W An attempt had been made to The application medium overwrite user data on a WORM software does not overwrite medium recognize the attempted 1 If a WORM medium was used medium as WORM inadvertently replace it with a normal data medium 2 If a WORM medium was used intentionally a Check that the software application is compatible with the WORM medium format you are using b Check that the medium is bar coded correctly for WORM 61 Reserved 64 Media Recognition System MRS is a method where pre defined stripes are placed at the beginning of the media to identify the media The MRS stripes are read to determine if the media is of data grade Data grade media should be used in SCSI streaming devices since it is of the required quality and consistency to be used to store data i e audio video grade media should not be used Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 293 Appendix B Tape Alert Flag Descriptions 294 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Appendix C Disposal of Electrical and Elec
230. itions 0 0 000 cee ee 55 Viewing the Current Partitions 00002000 56 Changing Access to Partitions 000 2c eee 57 Taking a Partition Online or Offline 57 Configuring Cleaning Slots 0 000 c eee ee 59 Configuring IVE Station Slots 0 2 0 0 eee 62 Configuring Tape Drive Parameters 000 cee eee ee 64 Configuring Control Paths 0 0000 eee 66 Adding or Upgrading Licensable Features 000 000 68 About License Keys 2 000000 c cee ee 68 Viewing Your License Keys 2 0 00 ee 69 Viewing Installed Licenses 0 0000 e eee eee 69 Obtaining a License Key 0 00 00 cee 69 Applying a License Key 0 2 2 00 00 70 Working With E mail Notifications 020000 eee eee 71 Creating E mail Notifications 00 0200 000 ae 72 Modifying E mail Notifications 0000005 73 Deleting E mail Notifications 000000 00s 74 Configuring the Library E Mail Account 0 00000 eee 75 Setting Customer Contact Information 00000005 77 Configuring the Service Port 0 0 0 0 cece ee 78 Working With Local User Accounts and Passwords 79 Using the Web Client Default Administrator Account 79 Privilege Levels 0 cee ee 80 Creating Local User Accounts on the Web Client 81 Modifying Local User Accounts on the Web Client 82 Deleting Local
231. ity string from the Web client only Web Client 1 Select Setup gt Network Management gt SNMP 2 Enter anew community string in the SNMP Community text box under New Settings 3 Click Apply The SNMP Management Information Base MIB is for library customers partners third party management software developers and other parties interested in integrating the Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 with commercial management frameworks The Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 libraries support SNMP by publishing a MIB that can be queried to obtain the status of the library and many of its individual components Administrators can download the SNMP MIB from the library The MIB can then be installed on an SNMP external management application Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 45 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Setting the Date Time and Time Zone For more information about the library MIB see the Scalar i40 and Scalar 180 Basic SNMP Reference Guide 6 66773 xx or contact Quantum Support For information on integrating MIBs with an SNMP management application contact your network management application vendor Web Client 1 Select Tools gt Download SNMP MIB 2 Save the file to a known location Setting the Date Time and Time Zone You can either set the library date time and time zone settings manually or configure the Network Time Protocol NTP NTP allows you to synchronize the library date and time with other co
232. ive Status Ready status of the current control path tape drive Active Connected Whether the current control path tape drive is connected and has a working link Standby Drive Location of the standby tape drive Standby Status Ready status of the standby tape drive Standby Connected Whether the standby tape drive is connected and has a working link Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 5 Advanced Reporting Using Advanced Reporting Reports Figure 18 Force CPF Screen Force Control Path Failover Force a CPF enabled partition to fail over to the standby control path drive This operation may cause a brief interruption of host connectivity Note The standby drive must be ready and have a good FC link in order to force a failover Partition Active Drive Active Status Active Connected Standby Drive Standby Status Standby Connected Olibrary_a D Ready Connected 02 Ready Connected 3 Select the partition on which you want to force the failover and click Apply Note The standby tape drive must be ready and connected in order to force a failover 4 Click Apply The new active tape drive location displays in the Active Drive column The new standby tape drive location displays in the Standby Drive column Note If the new tape drive locations do not display refresh the browser Using Advanced Reporting Reports The following notes will help you int
233. kes up to 5 minutes per magazine Details about running the IVT include Running the IVT takes partitions offline and logs all users off of the Web client The operator panel displays progress of all three subtests Before a test begins its progress is Scheduled When a test begins its progress changes to Running Once a test completes its progress changes to either Passed or Failed You can stop the IVT by pressing the Stop button The progress of the currently running test changes to Stopping Once stopped the current test and all other scheduled tests display Stopped You can only perform the IVT from the operator panel Prerequisites for Running IVT Certain prerequisites must be met in order to run the IVT Prior to running the IVT the library checks to make sure all the prerequisites are met If any is not the operator panel displays a message telling you how to resolve the issue Prerequisites include All diagnostic tickets must be closed I E station slots must be allocated minimum of five All magazines must be installed in the library two in the Scalar i40 four in the Scalar i80 At least one tape drive must be installed in the library All installed tape drives must be in the ready state You can check the Web client Setup gt Drive Settings for listing of which drives are in the ready state Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 263 Chapter 10 Trouble
234. kets from the Web client 1 Select Tools gt All Diagnostic Tickets 2 Click the Include Closed Tickets check box Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Capturing Snapshots of Library Information Note Tickets that were auto closed are designated as Canceled Capturing Snapshots of Library Information Technical support personnel may ask you to capture a snapshot of the library so they can better diagnose issues The Capture Snapshot operation captures detailed information about the entire library in a single ASCII file that can be e mailed to technical support personnel The logged information consists of configuration data status information and trace logs for library components Trace logs collect problem data and provide support personnel with vital library information for troubleshooting and solving problems You can e mail the snapshot file from the Web client You can also download the Capture Snapshot file to a computer however you cannot print Capture Snapshot files directly from the Web client Depending on the library configuration and your connection speed saving the snapshot file takes approximately 30 minutes The resulting file size can be large Your firewall file size limitations could prohibit you from e mailing the file On the Web client ensure that the library e mail account is appropriately configured before you attempt to e mail the snapshot from the lib
235. l and anti static wrapping in case you need to move or ship the library in the future 8 Remove the Y tray restraint The Y tray restraint consists of four 4 thumbscrews a plastic sheet a small metal clip and underneath the plastic sheet an orange restraint tab located on the top cover of the library See Figure 7 a Unscrew and remove the four thumbscrews from the top cover see Figure 7 Save the thumbscrews in case you need to move or ship the library in the future b Remove the plastic sheet and metal clip and discard You will not need to use them again Caution Remove the orange shipping restraint tab and discard You will not need to use it again Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 17 Chapter 2 Unpacking the Library Figure 7 Removing the Robot Restraint Metal clip Plastic 9 8 sheet e y A _ Orange tab N Note The Y tray may stay at the top of the library or it may move downward toward the floor of the library If it moves downward you will hear the gears turning as it moves This is normal 9 Once you remove the Y tray restraint you may cover the holes in the library top cover with stickers which are provided in the accessory kit for this purpose This step is optional and is intended to prevent small objects from accidentally falling into the library through the holes 10 Remove the protective plastic sheet covering the front panel display 18 Q
236. lag Descriptions Tape Alert is an open industry standard that flags errors and provides possible solutions for storage devices and their media This section provides information about Tape Alert flags issued by tape drives including the identifying number severity recommended message and probable cause Table 10 explains the severity codes and Table 11 lists all the existing Tape Alert flags and their descriptions Support for specific Tape Alert flags may vary based on tape drive type and firmware revision Not all tape drives support every Tape Alert Consult your tape drive SCSI manual for more information For more information on Tape Alert see http www t10 org index html for INCITS SCS Stream Command s 3 SSC 3 l Informational W Warning The system may not be operating optimally Continued operation without corrective action may cause a failure or raise critical Tape Alert flags C Critical Either a failure has already occurred or a failure is imminent Corrective action is required Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 285 Appendix B Tape Alert Flag Descriptions Table 11 Tape Drive Tape Alert Flag Descriptions Recommended Application Client No Flag Severity Message Probable Cause 1 Read warning W The tape drive is having problems The drive is having reading data No data has been lost severe trouble but there has been a reducti
237. less of library size This means you only need to purchase the license once If you increase the size of your library your existing license applies to your new library configuration Advanced Reporting provides the following features and reports that you can configure for viewing and analysis Control Path Failover CPF Provides support for configuring the LTO 5 or LTO 6 drive for control path failover When control path failover is used one drive is assigned as the primary control path and another drive as the control path failover secondary drive The control path failover drive is used whenever the primary control path drive fails or is inoperable Reports Listed below are report names You can view configure send via e mail and save and reuse report configurations as templates In addition you can automatically e mail any of the reports to designated recipients at specified scheduled times Drive Resource Utilization Report Provides tape drive usage information showing you which tape drives are working at optimum capacity and which are under utilized This can help you allocate your tape drive resources properly e Media Integrity Analysis Report Provides Tape Alert count for various combinations of tape drives tape cartridges and Tape Alert flags This can help you determine if a problem is due to a specific tape drive or tape cartridge Logs Listed below are available logs e Media Security Log Lists medi
238. ll outward on the magazine bezel handle to open the IE station If you do not open the magazine within 30 seconds it locks Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 147 Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Releasing Magazines 5 When finished push the magazine in completely The I E station is now locked Releasing Magazines Magazines are locked during normal operation Before you open or completely remove a magazine you must release it either via the user interface or manually as described in e Releasing Magazines via the User Interface on page 149 e Releasing Magazines Manually on page 150 When you give the command to release a magazine via the operator panel or Web client the robot physically moves to the unlock mechanism and unlocks it This takes a few seconds Once unlocked you have 30 seconds to open the magazine before it locks again Note All storage slots contained in an open or removed magazine are unavailable to applications Note If you want to remove more than one magazine such as when bulk loading tape cartridges release and remove all the magazines you want to remove before you close any of them Otherwise if you remove and replace them one at a time you must wait for the robot to complete inventory on the one being replaced before it can release another one Caution Ifthe library is turned ON always release the magazines via the user interface It is easier
239. ly removing power Otherwise the following could occur The library may not complete closing all data and log files If you turn off power or unplug the power cord while writing to tape the data on the tape could become corrupted The robot may become frozen in the middle of an operation and unable to move once library power is restored possibly requiring a service call 1 Make sure the connected host applications are not sending commands to the library and that all library operations have stopped 2 Shut down the library see Shutting Down the Library on page 140 3 Turn OFF the library by physically pressing the power button on the library s front panel see Turning Off the Library on page 143 Make sure the operator panel turns off or the LED on the SCB turns off 4 Disconnect the power cord s from all power supplies on the back of the library If there are two power supplies disconnect both cords Power is completely removed from the library when the LED on each power supply is off Emergency Power off In an emergency you may need to turn off power immediately to stop Procedure robot motion bypassing the normal shutdown process In an emergency you can turn off power in one of two ways e Press the power button on the front of the library to turn the library OFF It may take up to 4 seconds for all motion to completely stop 144 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 6
240. m Status buttons see Subsystem Status on page 30 Whichever method you choose the tickets are displayed in order of last occurrence of each event beginning with the most recent Note Last Occurrence indicates the last time a ticket event occurred This information updates any time the event recurs Last Occurrence does NOT update if you open close or resolve the diagnostic ticket Ticket details are not updated when a ticket recurs 2 Identify the diagnostic ticket you want to resolve Note You can use the Go to Diagnostic Ticket text box at the bottom of the screen to locate a specific ticket number In addition if there is more than one page of tickets use the Page 1 of x arrows to view the additional tickets 3 To view more details about the ticket including the location coordinates of resources that may be involved click the Details button 4 To resolve the ticket click the Resolve button A series of screens guides you through steps to resolve the issue on your own If the situation cannot be resolved you are instructed to contact technical support When you have finished reading all of the Resolution screens do one of the following e To close the ticket now click Close The Tools All Diagnostic Tickets window displays with the ticket no longer in the list e To leave the ticket open for future troubleshooting click Exit The ticket remains on the list Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User
241. mail Comment eas 3 Under Select Reports select the check box of the report s and log s you want to send 4 Under Notification Day amp Time there are two drop down lists From the first drop down list select the day of the week you want to send the e mail or select Daily to send every day From the second drop down list select the time of day to send the e mail hourly using a 24 hour clock In the E mail Address field enter the recipient s e mail address 6 In the E mail Comment field enter a comment that will be sent in the body of the e mail optional Note Only letters numbers spaces and hyphens are allowed in this fields Do not use any special characters like commas apostrophes to name a few 7 Click Apply Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 133 Chapter 5 Advanced Reporting Automatically E mailing Advanced Reporting Reports and Logs 8 On the Success window click Close 9 Save the library configuration For instructions on how to save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Modifying a Recipient Web Client 1 Select Setup gt Notifications gt Advanced Reporting gt Receiver Addresses The Setup Advanced Reporting Receiver Addresses screen displays Click Modify Change any of the settings and click Apply On the Success window click Close u A U N Save the library configuration For instructions on how to save the l
242. make sure you removed the Y tray restraint as described in Chapter 2 Unpacking the Library e Press the Tickets button on the operator panel to view any diagnostic tickets that occurred as a result of the error e Log in to the Web client using the IP address that is displayed on the operator panel screen to view ticket details and resolution steps that may help resolve the issue If none of the above steps works contact Quantum Support The Web client includes a header that contains the company logo product name and the three main navigation buttons Home Help and Logout In addition a message in the header alerts you when the library is not ready No message displays in the header when the library is in a ready state For more information on Web client user interface elements see Web Client Layout and Functions on page 27 Library not ready messages continue to display in the header until the issue has been resolved and the robot has completed its calibration Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Library Not Ready Messages If the library displays a not ready message you may be able to tell from the message how to remedy the situation If not the library generates a diagnostic ticket whenever the library encounters a problem The diagnostic ticket may provide information that can help you troubleshoot the problem For more information see Abo
243. mber of passes 20 Cleaning C required The tape drive needs cleaning 1 If the operation has stopped eject the tape and clean the drive 2 If the operation has not stopped wait for it to finish and then clean the drive Check the tape drive user s manual for device specific cleaning instructions The drive thinks it has a head clog or needs cleaning 288 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Appendix B Tape Alert Flag Descriptions Recommended Application Client No Flag Severity Message Probable Cause 21 Cleaning W The tape drive is due for routine The drive is ready for requested cleaning a periodic cleaning 1 Wait for the current operation to finish 2 Then use a cleaning cartridge Check the tape drive user s manual for device specific cleaning instructions 22 Expired C The last cleaning cartridge used in the The cleaning cartridge cleaning media tape drive has worn out has expired 1 Discard the worn out cleaning cartridge 2 Wait for the current operation to finish 3 Then use a new cleaning cartridge 23 Invalid cleaning C The last cleaning cartridge used in the Invalid cleaning tape tape drive was an invalid type cartridge type used 1 Do not use this cleaning cartridge in this drive 2 Wait for the current operation to finish 3 Then use a valid cleaning cartridge 24 Retension W The tape drive has requested a The drive is having requested retension op
244. media usage information regarding capacity and read and write errors for media ever mounted in a drive Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 5 Advanced Reporting Working with Control Path Failover CPF Required Firmware To use all the features of Advanced Reporting you should install the latest released version of library firmware on your library For information on installing library firmware see Updating Library Firmware on page 235 Working with Control Path Failover CPF If an LTO 5 or LTO 6 FC tape drive is the control path for a partition you can select another LTO 5 or LTO 6 FC tape drive in that partition for control path failover This means that if the control path tape drive fails the failover tape drive becomes the control path for the partition The failed over tape drive remains the control path for the partition unless it fails or the library is restarted When either of these events occurs the library starts over and attempts to use the original control path tape drive as the control path and the original failover tape drive for failover The control path and failover tape drives are assigned by location in the library so even if you replace a tape drive with another LTO 5 or LTO 6 FC tape drive the library will still fail over or revert to the specified location Prerequisites To configure control path failover you must have the following setup on your library e Advance
245. ment ID Physical An address used by a library to locate and track library component The address is based on the physical location of a component within a library Applications expect to see resources at specific IDs Ethernet A type of local area network designed to transport data at rates up to 100 million bits per second Other software such as TCP IP runs on top of Ethernet to provide high level networking services to applications Event A condition that matches a numbered predefined set of circumstances Event log A list of all predefined events logged by library and software management tools F FC Fibre Channel A high speed data transfer architecture Using optical fibre to connect devices Fibre Channel communications are serial communications that occur at full duplex and achieve data transfer rates of 200 MBps FC AL Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop A form of Fibre Channel network in which up to 126 nodes are connected in a loop topology See also Arbitrated loop FC AL Device A device that employs Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop and consists of one or more NL Ports Fiber A thin filament of glass An optical waveguide consisting of a core and a cladding which is capable of carrying information in the form of light Fiber is also a general term used to cover all Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 299 Glossary 300 physical media types supported by Fibre Channel such as optical fiber twisted pai
246. ming one of the following actions e Reset power cycle the tape drives on which you want to install firmware This autolevels only the tape drives you reset If you reset all tape drives at once each tape drive is reset sequentially causing the autoleveling to occur one tape drive at a time If you reset each tape drive individually you must wait for the autolevel to occur before proceeding to the next tape drive It takes about 7 minutes to autolevel each tape drive For instructions see Resetting a Tape Drive on page 268 e Restart the library This verifies and autolevels all tape drives simultaneously This process takes about 7 minutes for the autolevel plus the time it normally takes the library to reboot From the Web client select Operations gt System Shutdown Select Restart and click Apply See Restarting the Library on page 142 for more information The operator panel displays a message indicating autoleveling is taking place If the install or autolevel fails you receive a diagnostic ticket 4 Wait until autoleveling is complete before resuming host commands To make sure autoleveling is complete check the system information report to see if the tape drive firmware is installed on all intended tape drives From the Web client select Reports gt System Information Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 245 Chapter 9 Updating Firmware Updating and Autoleveling Tape Drive Firmware 246 Quantum Scalar
247. mmunicating ports in a loop Two or more ports can interconnect but only two ports can communicate simultaneously Arbitration The submission of a request to gain access to an arbitrated loop by a device so that it can transmit data in the loop B Barcode Aprinted array of varied rectangular bars and spaces that can be scanned and read for object identification Bus A transmission channel through which electrical signals are carried from one device to another device Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 297 Glossary 298 Cartridge A container that is a protective housing for storage media such as cartridges for tapes or optical disks Cleaning tape cleaning cartridge A tape used to clean recording heads and reading heads on a tape drive Cleaning slot The physical home where a cleaning tape or cartridge resides COD Capacity on Demand A library feature that allows users to have a large physical library but only be licensed to use a subset of its total capacity Users pay only for what they are currently using License upgrades enable more capacity without causing a system interruption Connectivity The method by which hardware devices or software communicate with other hardware or software Control path The connection between a partition and host application The control path connection is made through a designated tape drive Only one tape drive can be selected as the control path per partition
248. mponents in your IT infrastructure If you enable NTP you must also configure the IP address of at least one NTP server Contact your network administrator for NTP server IP address information You can configure the date and time on both the operator panel and the Web client You can view the time zone on the operator panel but must use the Web client to change it You can only configure NTP settings on the Web client Note The following operations should not be performed concurrently by multiple administrators logged in from different locations You can access the appropriate screens but you cannot apply changes while another administrator is performing the same operation 46 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Setting the Date and Time Manually Setting the Date and Time Using the Network Time Protocol Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Setting the Date Time and Time Zone Date and time settings are used to log the date and time events take place and to set the time for automatic backup and restore functions At a minimum you should set the library s date and time as part of the initial library configuration The time is set to a 24 hour clock For example four o clock in the afternoon is entered as 16 00 Operator Panel 1 Select Setup gt Date amp Time 2 Modify the date and time using the method described in Navigating and Editing on the Operator Panel on page 25 Web Client
249. munication Interfaces 0 000 00 cee 282 Supported Tape Drives 0 00 c ee eee 282 Supported Media 0 000 ccc eee 283 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide xi Contents Supported Internet Browsers 0 000000 cee 283 Supported Operating Systems 000 00 ee 284 Appendix B Tape Alert Flag Descriptions 285 Appendix C Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment 295 Glossary 297 Index 307 xii Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 Figure 12 Figure 13 Figure 14 Figure 15 Figure 16 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Figures Front Panel 0 0 eee 2 Scalar i40 Internal Layout and Magazine Slot Location Coordinates 0 0 cc ee 6 Scalar i80 Internal Layout and Magazine Slot Location Coordinates aa asierea ai aa aa a ani ee 7 Scalar i40 Back Panel Components 10 Scalar i80 Back Panel Components 10 Packa iNg isi tise evi ee badaiaianeie de ea 16 Removing the Robot Restraint 000 18 Operator Panel User Interface Home Screen 20 Operator Panel User Interface Alternate Home Screen 21 Using the Buttons to Set the Date and Time 26 Web Client User Interface Home Page 28 Operator Panel Menus asusunu aaua aaea 32 Web Client Menu
250. n gt 4 Root DSE 2 dc mycompany dc com 3 cn admin v amp ou groups 3 cn admins W cn users amp ou partitions 1 cn library_a 4 ou people 2 cn lib_user amp ou admins 1 The LDAP server configuration shown to the right would give the library settings shown in the sample screen below Setup Remote Authentication Authenticate logins against a third party service Authentication Type Local Only LDAP LDAP with Kerberos C LDAP Server G cn lib_admin Server URI Ex Idap hostname 389 StatTLS M Check if your LDAP server supports this extension Install TLS CA Certificate J Browse Refer to online help for further details Remove TLS CA Certificate C Check to remove the installed certificate Principal a user with search permissions Refer to your LDAP vendor for syntax Password Confirm Password Authorization User DN J Ex cn users ou system dc mycompany dc com Group DN Ex cn groups ou system dc mycompany dc com Library User Group J Only members of this group can manage this library J Members of this group are granted the administrator Library Admin Group privilege User Password Apply any changes to the settings before using this test Test with a user that belongs to both the User and Admin groups 4 Click Apply to apply any changes If you enabled LDAP or modified LDAP settings the Test Settings button is activated
251. n as eight groups of four hexadecimal digits 2001 0ff8 55cc 033b 1319 8a2e 01de 1374 is an example of a valid IPv6 address Also if one or more of the four digit groups contains 0000 you can omit the zeros and replace them with two colons as long as there is only one double colon used in an address Using this notation 2001 0ff8 0000 0000 0000 0000 01de 1374 is the same as 2001 0ff8 01de 1374 You can configure IPv4 addresses on the operator panel or Web client You can set the library to use IPv6 via the operator panel but you must use the Web client to configure a static IPv6 address Operator Panel 1 2 Select Setup gt Network Configuration Modify the IP address using the method described in Navigating and Editing on the Operator Panel on page 25 Web Client Select Setup gt Network Management gt Network These settings have specific configuration requirements as follows Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway for your portion of the Ethernet network For IPv4 this setting can only be changed if DHCP is disabled Subnet Mask IPv4 only Available only if DHCP is disabled Network Prefix IPv6 only Can be entered only on the Web client Primary DNS Address optional Web client only Must be entered as an IP address This text box is available only if DHCP is disabled Secondary DNS Address optional Web client only Must be entered as an IP address This text box
252. n coordinates 0 2 and so on Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 9 Chapter 1 Description Library Components Figure 4 Scalar i40 Back Panel Components Figure 5 Scalar i80 Back Panel Components 10 Half height tape drives Power supply cord Tape drive cables Ethernet Service port cable in LEFT do not use SCB port Half height tape drives Power supply cord Power supply filler plate Ethernet cable in Service port LEFT SCB port d t Tape drive cables us ARRS Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 1 Description Standard Features Standard Features User Interface Partitions Control Path Modification This section describes several features of Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 libraries The operator panel is located on the front of the library and allows you to work locally on the library via the user interface The Web client allows you to view and perform library functions from remote sites and is accessible through a browser The operator panel and Web client each contain a different user interface and functionality See Chapter 3 Understanding the User Interface for more information about the operator panel and the Web client Partitions are virtual sections within a library that present the appearance of multiple separate libraries for purposes of file management access by multiple users or dedication to
253. n on page 145 Caution If the I E station area needs to be reconfigured consider the affected I E area slots as well as any affected partition storage slots to ensure tape cartridges are not present in any storage slots that will be included in the new I E area configuration and tape cartridges are not present when excluded from an I E area configuration Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 63 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Configuring Tape Drive Parameters Operator Panel Select Setup gt Dedicated Slots gt I E Press Modify Use the Up and Down buttons to select a value 1 2 3 4 Press Apply 5 Press Exit 6 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Web Client 1 Select Setup gt I E Station Slots The I E Station Configuration screen displays The Current Settings column lists the number of I E station slots that are currently configured 2 Under the New Settings column select the number of I E station slots to configure 3 Click Apply 4 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Configuring Tape Drive Parameters You can configure Fibre Channel tape drive loop ID topology and speed using the operator panel or the Web client On the Web client you can also view the actual topology and speed plus the tape drive s world wide node name WWNN and other informat
254. n the local user interface the default home screen or the alternate home screen that allows easy I E unlock access Figure 8 and Figure 9 depict these screen options Table 2 describes the operator panel functions Name Status Health status Active display Menu bar Navigation selection buttons 20 You can choose to change the view of the home screen for easy I E unlock access Refer to Changing Operator Panel Home Screen View on page 108 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 3 Understanding the User Interface Operator Panel Figure 9 Operator Panel User Interface Alternate Home Screen Scalar i40 Scalar i40 ETE EA State a Number of occupied I E a 1 Full l E slots Number of configured l E slots I E Unlock I E Station Scalar i80 Rae Sas ere 08 State _ nn eee Number of occupied I E 1 Full E slots Number of Bottom Top configured I E slots I E I E Menu J unlock unlock sean Unlock bottom Unlock top VE Station IE Station Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 21 Chapter 3 Understanding the User Interface Operator Panel Table 2 Operator Panel Description The title bar is present on every screen and contains three fields name status and health status The name field displays a description of the current view It changes depending on the menu selection e On the home screen the field displays
255. ng a Saved Template To use a saved template select the template from the drop down list and click Load Deleting a Template To delete a template select the template from the drop down list and click Delete When you first open an Advanced Report configuration screen the system loads all the data from the library log file for that report to the Internet browser in preparation for creating your reports If there is a lot of information in the log files this may take several minutes The data that is loaded in the Internet browser remains unchanged until you log out of your library session or reload the data If new data is added to the library log file during your session for example a TapeAlert occurs it will not appear in the on screen report until you either log out of the library and log on again or reload the data To reload the data without logging out click the Reload button on the report s configuration page This action reloads the entire data for that report which may again take several minutes You can see how many records were loaded from the log files for this report by looking at the Report Data section of the Report Configuration page A note says XX records read where XX is the number of records see Figure 20 on page 125 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Deleting Advanced Reporting Data Figure 20 Report Data Buttons Saving and E mailing Advanced Reporting Data Files
256. ng off the library If you do not perform a shutdown the library attempts to complete all shutdown operations before turning off the library However it may not have enough time to shut down completely and operations could be stopped mid process Caution You should always perform a shutdown before turning off the library or completely removing power Otherwise the following could occur The library may not complete closing all data and log files If you turn off power while writing to tape the data on the tape could become corrupted 1 Make sure the connected host applications are not sending commands to the library and that all library operations have stopped 2 Shut down the library see Shutting Down the Library on page 140 3 Turn OFF the library by physically pressing the power button on the library s front panel It can take up to 12 seconds for the power to completely turn off Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 143 Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Shutting Down Restarting Turning Off and Removing Power Note Turning off the library does not completely remove library power see Completely Removing Library Power on page 144 Completely Removing Completely removing library power means disconnecting the power Library Power cord from each power supply on the library Caution You should always perform a shutdown and then turn off library power before complete
257. nly change this setting on the operator panel Understanding Host Application Notification When manual cartridge assignment is enabled SCSI Unit Attention 6 2801 notifies the host application when the I E station has been accessed allowing the host to automatically detect the presence of media in the I E station and update its I E station status information When manual cartridge assignment is disabled host notification via SCSI Unit Attention 6 2801 depends on the number of configured partitions If multiple partitions are defined the host application is not notified when the I E station has been accessed Media presence in the I E station is reported to any partition requesting it If a single partition is defined the host application is notified when the I E station has been accessed Media presence is reported to the sole defined partition as well as to the System partition when either of these partitions checks for changes in the status of the I E station For information about using the host to perform tape operations see your host application documentation Operator Panel 1 Select Setup gt System Settings gt Man Cart Assign 2 Press Modify 3 Use the Up and Down buttons to select Enabled or Disabled and press Apply Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 99 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Configuring System Settings 4 Make another selection or press Exit 5 Save the library configuration s
258. nses you have purchased and obtained go to the following Web site http www quantum com licensekeys The license history for each feature is listed feature licensed authorization code and date license key was obtained To see which licenses are installed on your library go to the following screens Operator Panel Select either of the following e Reports gt Licenses e Setup gt License Installation Web Client Select Setup gt License To obtain your license key for a new feature or upgrade 1 Contact your Quantum technical sales representative to submit your order for the feature or upgrade 2 Upon receipt of your order Quantum will mail you a license key certificate containing your authorization code Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 69 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Adding or Upgrading Licensable Features 3 On your library locate the serial number You will need the serial number to retrieve your license key from the Web site To locate the serial number e On the operator panel select Reports gt About Library e On the Web client select Reports gt About gt Scalar i40 i80 4 Access the License Key Management Web site http www quantum com licensekeys 5 Enter the information requested on the screen to obtain your license key You are now ready to apply the license key to the library See Applying a License Key on page 70 Applying a License Key Once purchased
259. nstall library firmware In some cases a tape drive firmware upgrade or patch may be available from Quantum Support outside of the normal library firmware release cycle The instructions in this section explain how to install such an upgrade or patch You can also use these instructions to install down rev tape drive firmware If you wish to do this contact Quantum Support for the firmware image files Caution Only install tape drive firmware image files that have been tested and qualified by Quantum It is not necessary to delete an existing version of firmware before uploading a new version The new version overwrites the existing version Note Uploading tape drive firmware for autoleveling only uploads the firmware to the library in preparation for autoleveling It does not initiate autoleveling or install firmware on the tape drive To initiate autoleveling see Initiating Tape Drive Firmware Autoleveling on page 245 You can only upload tape drive firmware on the Web client Note If the library is enabled for encryption unload tapes from all drives before upgrading the drive firmware 242 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 9 Updating Firmware Updating and Autoleveling Tape Drive Firmware Web Client 1 Check the Quantum Web site to see if you are running the current level of firmware go to http Awww quantum com ServiceandSupport SoftwareandDocumentationDownloads S 40
260. nterpreting LEDs 0 0000 c eee ee 257 Front Panel LEDS 0 00000 eee eee ee 257 System Control Board LEDs 00002 ee eee 259 Tape Drive Sled LEDS 0 0 2 2 0 0000 e eee eee 260 Power Supply LED 00 000 cece eee eee 261 Running the Installation and Verification Test IVT 262 Running the IVT Diagnostic Subtests Individually Robotics Tape Drive and Magazine Tests 0 000 cee tee 264 Running the Random Move Test 0 00 c eee eee 266 Performing Library Diagnostics 00 e eee ee 267 Resetting a Tape Drive 0 000 cee ee 268 Robotics Get Put Test 0 0 ee 269 Resetting Factory Defaults 0 0000 c eee ee 270 Chapter 11 Working With Cartridges and Barcodes 271 Handling Tape Cartridges Properly 00 000 cease 272 Write Protecting Tape Cartridges 0 000 eee eee 273 Barcode Label Requirements 0000 00 c cece eee eee 273 Supported Barcode Formats 00 000 cece ee 274 Installing Barcode Labels nnua 0 2 000 eee ee 275 Appendix A Specifications 277 Physical Specifications 00 0 eee 277 Capacity oe kee oie oe eae ake R e ofa ate donate eee dee 278 Environmental Specifications 0000 e eee ee 279 Air Clearance Requirements 000000 cece eee 279 Library Power Specifications 0 00002 e eee eee 280 Power Consumption and Heat Output 000005 281 Com
261. o Auto negotiate default 1 Gb s 2 Gb s 4 Gb s or 8 Gb s depending on the tape drive For example LTO 4 drives will not support speeds faster than 4 GB s and LTO 6 tape drives will not support speeds less than 2 Gb s Auto tries to use the most appropriate fastest drive settings On the Web client the Setup Drive Settings screen displays both the requested and the actual FC topology connection mode and interface speed If FC drives are not connected to the host the negotiated actual settings appear on the screen as unknown Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 65 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Configuring Control Paths Operator Panel 1 Select Setup gt Tape Drives FC 2 If more than one Fibre Channel tape drive is installed use the Up and Down buttons to select a tape drive and press Select 3 Use the Up and Down buttons to select the item to configure Speed Topology or Loop ID and press Modify 4 Use the Up and Down buttons to scroll through the list of options until you reach the one you want then press Apply 5 Continue to modify as above When finished press Exit 6 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Web Client 1 Select Setup gt Drive Settings 2 View the SAS tape drive settings if desired 3 Make changes to any of the Fibre Channel tape drive settings by using the drop down lists to select new values
262. o transporting them to another SKM server When sharing tape cartridges you need to import the encryption certificate of the destination SKM server Note This function is available to administrators and only applies to SKM servers Both SKM servers must be connected and operational in order to import encryption keys Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 205 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Performing Scalar Key Manager Functions Available on the Library To import encryption certificates 1 Before starting this process read and follow the sequence of steps outlined in Sharing Encrypted Tape Cartridges on page 203 2 Receive the encryption certificate file from the destination SKM server administrator and save it to a known location on your computer 3 From the Tools menu select EKM Management gt Encryption Certificate gt Import brea n Setup Operations Tools Reports User admin Admi Encryption Certificates Tools SKM Encryption Certificate Import Import an encryption certificate Note Encryption key certificates imported via this page are made available for use in exporting encryption keys from the library Encryption Certificate File Browse _ tiii Click Browse to locate the saved encryption certificate file Click Open Click Apply to import the certificate onto your SKM server N QAU A Back up both SKM servers to protect against catastrophic server failure
263. ocks it This takes a few seconds Once unlocked you have 30 seconds to open the I E station before it locks again Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 145 Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Unlocking and Opening the I E Station Opening the I E station consists of pulling outward on the magazine bezel handle until the magazine stops moving The magazine will automatically stop when the entire I E station is exposed Note Because the I E station is part of the magazine all storage slots contained in that magazine are unavailable to applications during the time that the I E station is open Note On the Scalar i80 if you want to open more than one IE station such as when importing multiple tape cartridges unlock and open both I E stations before you close either of them Otherwise if you open and close one at a time you must wait for the robot to complete inventory on the one being closed before it can open the other one For more information about the physical location and capacity of the I E station see Configuring I E Station Slots on page 62 Operator Panel 1 If viewing from the default home screen select Actions gt I E gt Unlock I E Station If viewing from the alternate home screen select Unlock 2 If more than one I E station is configured on the library select which IE station to unlock and press Unlock for the desired selection Note Only closed I E stations are listed
264. ompany com 88 e Domain Mapping The domain portion of the library s fully qualified domain name Example mycompany com e Service Keytab Click the Browse button to select the service keytab file The service keytab file is a file you generate on your Kerberos Active Directory server If you have not already generated this file do so now For instructions see Generating the Kerberos Service Keytab File on page 95 Then click the Browse button to upload the file 5 Configure the LDAP settings as described in Configuring LDAP on the Library on page 89 6 Click Apply to apply any changes 7 If you enabled LDAP or Kerberos or modified LDAP or Kerberos settings click the Test Settings button to test all the new or changed LDAP settings See Testing LDAP Settings on page 93 for more information 8 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 94 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Working With LDAP User Accounts Remote Authentication Generating the These instructions are for generating the service keytab file for use with Kerberos Service Keytab Microsoft Active Directory If you not using Active Directory refer to File your Kerberos vendor for instructions on generating this file 1 Set up an Active Directory domain on the Windows 2003 server 2 If Active Directory is not already configured run dcpromo 3 Window
265. on Library Components Figure 3 Scalar i80 Internal Layout and Magazine Slot Location Coordinates Robot on Y tray Top right magazine Top left AM PA am Bottom right magazine magazine Bottom left magazine Top Left Magazine Top Right Magazine Front Back Front Bottom Left Magazine Bottom Right Magazine 0 1 3 0 2 3 0 3 3 0 4 3 0 5 3 0 6 3 0 7 3 0 8 3 0 1 4 0 2 4 0 3 4 0 4 4 0 5 4 0 6 4 0 7 4 0 8 4 0 1 5 0 2 5 0 3 5 0 4 5 0 5 5 0 6 5 0 7 5 0 8 5 Front Back Front Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 7 Chapter 1 Description Library Components Power Supply System Control Board The Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 libraries support single power configurations consisting of a single AC line input and single DC power supply The Scalar i80 library supports a redundant power configuration consisting of a dual AC line input and dual DC power supplies If you have a Scalar i80 and are only using one power supply the power supply should be installed in the upper power supply slot and a filler plate must cover the empty power supply slot see Figure 5 on page 10 If you are using redundant power you can hot add or hot swap a power supply power to the library remains on while you add or exchange the hardware The Scalar i40 power supply cannot be installed in a Scalar i80 However the Scalar i80
266. on in the reading performance of the tape 2 Write warning W The tape drive is having problems The drive is having writing data No data has been lost but severe trouble there has been a reduction in the writing capacity of the tape 3 Hard error W The operation has stopped becausean The drive had a hard error has occurred while reading or read or write error writing data which the drive cannot correct 4 Media C Your data is at risk Media can no longer 1 Copy any data you require from this e written read or tape performance is 2 Do not use this tape again severe y degraded 3 Restart the operation with a different tape 5 Read failure C The tape is damaged or the drive is The drive can no faulty Call the tape drive supplier help longer read data from line the tape 6 Write failure C The tape is from a faulty batch or the The drive can no tape drive is faulty longer write data to 1 Use a good tape to test the drive the tape 2 If the problem persists call the tape drive supplier help line 7 Media life W The tape cartridge has reached the end The media has of its calculated useful life exceeded its specified 1 Copy any data you need to another life tape 2 Discard the old tape 286 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Appendix B Tape Alert Flag Descriptions Recommended Application Client No Flag Severity Message Probable Cause 8 Not data grade W The tape car
267. on selection buttons l Ticket indicator LED o o Power on LED rower button Table 1 Front Panel Features Feature Description Operator The operator panel displays library status panel screen information and allows you to access the library menus These menus allow you to view or change the library settings and run diagnostic tests For more information see Operator Panel on page 19 2 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Robotic System and Barcode Scanner Chapter 1 Description Library Components Feature Description Four naviga These buttons in combination with the operator tion selection panel display are used to scroll through screens and buttons select options or commands The functionality of these buttons changes depending on the currently displayed operator panel screen Ticket indica Indicates whether a diagnostic ticket exists on the tor LED library See Front Panel LEDs on page 257 and About Diagnostic Tickets on page 248 for more informa tion Power on LED Indicates whether library power is on or off See Front Panel LEDs on page 257 for more information Power button Turns the library on or off Turning off the library using the power button turns off the robot and operator panel but power still runs to the power supplies See Shutting Down Restarting Turning Off and Removing Power on page 139 for instructions on how to shut down the
268. on when it is in a known working state In the event of a hardware failure the saved configuration can be used to restore the configuration after hardware repairs are made Before initiating a firmware upgrade you should save the library configuration You then have the option to restore the configuration after either a successful or an unsuccessful upgrade You can only save the configuration from the Web client Web Client 1 Select Tools gt Save Restore Configuration 2 Select Save System Configuration 106 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Saving and Restoring the Library Configuration 3 Click Apply 4 When the operation completes successfully complete the next screens to save the file to a known location Restoring the Library You can restore the library s configurable items to a previous state using Configuration a saved configuration file If you updated the library firmware since last saving the configuration the library automatically restores the library firmware to the version that was saved with the configuration Caution After you restore the library s configuration verify that your drive firmware version reflects the desired firmware level Note You can also downgrade library firmware to an earlier version using the Tools gt Update Library Firmware command see Updating Library Firmware on page 235 Note that you will lose all your
269. operations so external management applications cannot register themselves to receive SNMP traps from the library After registering the transport protocols IP addresses and corresponding port numbers you can perform a test to verify that the library can send the SNMP traps to the addresses Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Configuring SNMP Settings When registering external management applications to receive SNMP traps you can set the following parameters e Transport The transport protocol This should be the same as the transport protocol configured on the SNMP trap receiver Select one of the following e UDP User Datagram Protocol for IPv4 e UDP6 User Datagram Protocol for IPv6 e TCP Transmission Control Protocol for IPv4 e TCP6 Transmission Control Protocol for IPv6 e Host Name IP Address The host name or the IP address of the external management application you want to register A host name may be entered only if DNS is enabled Otherwise IP addresses must entered For information on DNS see Default Gateway Subnet Mask Network Prefix and DNS Addresses on page 41 e Port the port number of the external application you want to register The default port number for an external application is 162 You can only perform these functions from the Web client Web Client 1 Select Setup gt Network Management gt SNMP Trap Registr
270. or to the downgrade and all tape drives will be autoleveled to the new baseline If you want to continue to use the patch or a different version of tape drive firmware you will need to upload it again Contact Quantum Support if you need help obtaining firmware see Getting More Information or Help on page xxv e Autoleveling will not occur if a tape drive has a cartridge loaded in it Make sure to unload tape cartridges from all tape drives before loading new firmware for autoleveling or before upgrading library firmware e Autoleveling occurs after the completes its initialization This means it is possible for a host to see the medium changer initially but when the autoleveling starts on the drives it is likely the medium changer will disappear again Wait until autoleveling completes before starting backup applications The operator panel displays a message indicating autoleveling is taking place Wait until this message disappears before starting backup applications Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 241 Chapter 9 Updating Firmware Updating and Autoleveling Tape Drive Firmware e Ifyou reset factory defaults any tape drive firmware images you manually uploaded will be deleted see Resetting Factory Defaults on page 270 Uploading Tape Drive Tape drive firmware is bundled with the library firmware and is Firmware Used in automatically installed and autoleveled on your tape drives when you Autoleveling i
271. ostic Tickets Automatically on page 252 after a reboot or power request the system may elect to close a ticket This cancelled state does not indicate that a problem has been corrected The system would re open the ticket if the issue is encountered again Operator Panel Select Reports gt Diagnostic Tickets Select Library Tape Drives or Media to view tickets related to the selected subsystem Only the subsystems that contain tickets are listed You can also close all tickets at once by selecting Close ALL Caution Be careful when choosing Close ALL This closes all diagnostic tickets even if they are not resolved It is recommended that each diagnostic ticket be viewed analyzed and closed individually Press Select All of the tickets posted for the selected subsystem are displayed Scroll through the tickets and select the one you want to view Press View Basic details about the ticket are displayed such as ticket ID number short description priority and when the ticket was created and updated You can either press Close to close the ticket or press Exit to exit without closing the ticket Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 10 Troubleshooting About Diagnostic Tickets Web Client 1 You can view all diagnostic tickets by selecting Tools gt All Diagnostic Tickets Alternatively you can view library tape drive and media tickets separately via the Home Page Subsyste
272. ou want to update the library firmware and reboot the library 7 Click OK to continue with the library firmware update operation Note Library initialization can take approximately 9 to 23 minutes for an i40 or 14 to 40 minutes for an i80 Do not interrupt the library during initialization The Progress Window displays The Progress Window contains information on the action elapsed time and status of the requested operation The Progress Window closes automatically and the library shuts down and then reboots You will need to log back into the library once it has finished rebooting Wait for the library to completely reboot before logging back in to the library The reboot takes several minutes If Failure appears in the Progress Window the operation failed The library will automatically reload the previous version of library firmware 8 Clear the Web browser cache before logging in to the library See your Web browser s documentation for instructions on how to clear the cache 9 Log in to the library Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 239 Chapter 9 Updating Firmware Updating and Autoleveling Tape Drive Firmware Note If the library is still in the process of restarting the Web browser may display an error page or message when you try to access or log in to the Web client 10 Verify the library firmware installed successfully Go to Tools gt Update Library Firmware or view the About Scalar i40
273. our new library configuration KMIP compliant Encryption Key Management The Key Management Interoperability Protocol KMIP is a specification developed by OASIS Its function is to standardize communication between enterprise key management systems and encryption systems With version i4 the Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 provide a KMIP version 1 0 compliant encryption solution With version i6 the Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 provide a KMIP version 1 2 compliant encryption solution KMIP is currently supported with SafeNet KeySecure and Thales keyAuthority servers Contact your Quantum representative for details Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 177 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management About Key Reuse Details about the Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 KMIP compliant implementation include e As with other encryption systems supported by the library in order to use KMIP compliant encryption systems with the Scalar i40 or Scalar i80 you must have an Encryption Key Management license installed on the library e A minimum of two KMIP compliant encryption servers are required for failover purposes A total of 10 KMIP compliant encryption servers are allowed for increased failover capability e As of library firmware version i6 160G LTO 4 LTO 5 and LTO 6 tape cartridges that are encrypted using Library Managed Encryption LME with a supported KMIP encryption management solution can only be decrypted using libr
274. page 198 for instructions on how to verify whether they are installed and how to install them Run the Manual EKM Path Diagnostics to be sure the library is connected properly to both SKM servers See Running Manual EKM Path Diagnostics on page 187 for instructions Encryption on the library is enabled by partition only You cannot select individual tape drives for encryption you must select an entire partition to be encrypted Data written to encryption supported and encryption capable media in EKM supported tape drives will be encrypted unless data was previously written to the media in a non encrypted format For data to be encrypted the media must be blank or have been written to using Library Managed Encryption at the first write operation at the beginning of tape BOT Configure the partition s as follows 1 From the Web client select Setup gt Encryption gt Partition Configuration A list of all your partitions displays along with the Encryption Method for each partition see Figure 32 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 183 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Scalar Key Manager SKM on the Library Note The default Encryption Method for a partition containing encryption capable tape drives is Application Managed Encryption LME disabled To enable encryption on a partition you must select the LME check box to enable Library Managed Encryption This is explained in the following
275. path for its partition and encryption method e Serial Attached SCSI SAS tape drive interface type tape drive type state ready not ready mode online offline assigned partition name location coordinates media barcode if media is in slot No_Label means unreadable barcode media type if media is in slot element address vendor model form factor half height or full height physical SN logical SN SAS Address tape drive firmware level whether the tape drive is the control path for its partition and encryption method e Slots The following information is provided for each slot type assigned partition name storage and I E station slots only location coordinates cartridge barcode storage and I E station slots only No_Label means unreadable barcode media type element address encryption method get count get retries put count and put retries If the slot is a cleaning slot the cleaning status usable expired and cleaning count the number of times the cartridge was used to clean a tape drive are also displayed e Partitions The following information is provided for each partition name status online offline emulation type barcode Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 221 Chapter 8 Getting Information About the Library Saving and E mailing the Library Configuration Record policy total number of tape drives number of active tape drives total media mounted media
276. pdate operation you can upgrade firmware to a later version or downgrade firmware to an earlier version Upgrading library firmware can take up to 30 minutes Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 235 Chapter 9 Updating Firmware Updating Library Firmware 236 Before updating library firmware it is recommended that you capture the library snapshot The library snapshot file saves status information and trace logs for library components This information helps technical support troubleshoot issues that might occur with the firmware upgrade For more information see Capturing Snapshots of Library Information on page 253 In addition it is recommended that you save the library configuration before upgrading the library in case the upgrade fails and again after the upgrade successfully completes For more information see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 When you upgrade or downgrade library firmware the library also autolevels tape drive firmware if needed Autoleveling will not occur if a tape drive has a cartridge loaded in it Make sure to unload all tape drives before updating library firmware See Updating and Autoleveling Tape Drive Firmware on page 240 The library automatically restarts after the firmware update is complete Before logging into the library clear the Web browser cache See your Web browser s documentation for instructions on how to clear the cache Caution After the
277. period is 15 minutes but you can change this see Setting the Session Timeout on page 96 Operator Panel 1 Select Actions gt Logout 2 Press Yes to confirm 138 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Shutting Down Restarting Turning Off and Removing Power Web Client 1 Click the ocout button in the upper right corner of the screen or select Operations gt Log Out 2 Click OK to confirm Shutting Down Restarting Turning Off and Removing Power It is important to shut down the library properly before turning off the library or completely removing library power Caution You should always perform a shutdown before turning off the library or completely removing power Otherwise the following could occur The library may not complete closing all data and log files If you turn off power or unplug the power cord while writing to tape the data on the tape could become corrupted If you unplug the power cord the robot may become frozen in the middle of an operation and unable to move once library power is restored possibly requiring a service call The steps for shutting down turning off and completely removing library power are 1 Make sure the connected host applications are not sending commands to the library and that all library operations have stopped 2 Shut down the library using the operator panel or Web client see
278. ple XXXXX or XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Select Multi initiator Conflict Warning selected by default to be alerted if a tape drive in the partition is receiving media access commands from multiple initiators These media access commands may be expected depending on your host configuration this option will send alerts for all media access commands in the event some of the commands are unexpected Media access commands can include erase format load unload locate read rewind send diagnostic set capacity verify or write Type the number of slots to assign to the new partition into the Enter Number of Slots text box Under the Select Drives section assign one or more available tape drives to the partition by selecting the check box located to the left of the tape drive 9 Click Apply Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Working With Partitions Modifying Partitions You can modify partition settings any time after a partition is created _ For example you can modify the name emulation type media barcode format and number of assigned tape drives and slots The library automatically takes the partition offline before modifying it and places it back online after it has been modified The tape drive set as the control path for a particular partition cannot be deleted from that partition The ch
279. ple At 0 4 4 e Picker Extended or Retracted e Picker Fingers Engaged or Released 3 Select Exit to return to the View Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 219 Chapter 8 Getting Information About the Library Viewing the Library Configuration Report Viewing the Library Configuration Report The Library Configuration Report is a dynamic representation of the various library resources including tape drives slots partitions and library chassis The report shows which slots are assigned to partitions I E stations configured as cleaning slots or unassigned whether the slot contains a tape drive and whether a tape drive is the control path for its partition You can view all slot location coordinates or media barcodes at the click of a button and get detailed information about a specific resource by clicking on it You can view the report on the Web client Web Client 1 Select Reports gt Library Configuration The Library Configuration Report displays in a new window 2 Do any of the following e In the Legend click a partition name to view information about the partition Note Each partition is assigned a number and color All slots and tape drives that are assigned to a partition are represented in the library map by the partition number and color e Inthe library map click a specific slot to view information about the slot e Inthe library map click a specific tape drive to vi
280. points in mind when using encryption on the library e Data written to encryption supported and encryption capable media in EXM supported tape drives will be encrypted unless data was previously written to the media in a non encrypted format In order for data to be encrypted the media must be blank or have Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management About the EKM License been written to using Library Managed Encryption at the first write operation at the beginning of tape BOT e You cannot append encrypted data to a non encrypted tape e You cannot append non encrypted data to an encrypted tape e Only one data encryption key can be used per tape cartridge e Encryption is configured by partition Partitions must be configured for Library Managed Encryption or LME EKM partitions must contain only the tape drives supported by the encryption system you are using For more information see Step 7 Configure Partitions for Library Managed Encryption on page 183 About the EKM License If you purchase an EKM license after you purchased your library you must install the license key on your library to enable the EKM functionality See Adding or Upgrading Licensable Features on page 68 for instructions The EKM license applies to the entire library regardless of how many slots are licensed If you increase the number of slots in your library your existing license applies to y
281. puter that initiates contact with storage devices Hot swappable The ability to replace a defective component while the system continues to function normally HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol The communication rules by which a Web browser client and a server delivering Web pages exchange information Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Glossary l I E Import Export The movement of data or hardware in and out of processing and storage systems I E slot A bin that contains a single piece of media in the station IE station A door on the front of the library that contains tape magazines into which cartridges to be imported are placed manually or cartridges to be exported are placed by the picker Interoperability The capability of two or more hardware devices or two or more software routines to work together IP Internet Protocol A protocol that specifies the formats of packets and addresses Addresses are formulated as four groups of 2 or 3 digit numbers separated by periods such as 255 255 255 255 K Kernel The heart of the UNIX operating system The kernel is the part of the operating system that allocates resources and controls processes The design strategy has been to keep the kernel as small as possible and to put the rest of the UNIX functionality into separately compiled and executed programs L L_Port Loop Port It only has the capability to communicate over FC AL hubs and through FL_Ports LED
282. r 3U 6U Maximum number of tape drives 2 half height tape drives 5 half height tape drives Number of magazines 2 magazines 20 slots each 4 magazines 20 slots each Number of cartridge slots Base unit 25 Fully licensed 40 Base unit 50 Fully licensed 80 Maximum native capacity 25 slots 20 TB 40 slots 32 TB 50 slots 40 TB 80 slots 64 TB Number of I E station slots 0 5 or 20 0 5 10 20 25 or 40 278 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Appendix A Specifications Environmental Specifications Environmental Specifications The environmental specifications of the library are listed below Note Temperature ranges apply to product inlet temperatures not necessarily to ambient room temperatures Airflow restrictions or other heat generating equipment within the rack enclosure may cause a rise over ambient room temperatures Operating Non Operating Shipping and Storage Altitude 500 to 10 000 ft 152 to 3 048 m 500 to 10 000 ft 152 to 3 048 m 500 to 10 000 ft 152 to 3 048 m Temperature 50 to 95 F 10 to 35 C 50 to 113 F 10 to 45 C 40 to 140 F 40 to 60 C Relative Humidity 20 to 80 non condensing 10 to 90 non condensing 0 to 95 non condensing Air Clearance Requirements There must be at least 4 in 10 cm of open space in fron
283. r and coaxial cable Firewall A set of security tools designed to separate an internal network from the public Internet in order to keep unauthorized users out of a restricted network Firewalls are the primary line of security defense for businesses FL_Port Fabric Loop Port An F_Port that is capable of supporting an attached Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop An FL_Port on a loop will have the AL_PA hex 00 giving the fabric the highest priority access to the loop N_Ports or NL_Ports can attach to it in an Arbitrated Loop topology and are capable of communicating with FC AL protocol FRU Field Replaceable Unit The smallest hardware component that can be replaced at a customer installation by a certified field service representative GUI Graphical User Interface A computer environment that provides a visual view of a system by incorporating windows icons menus and a pointing device Also referred to as a Windows Icons Mouse and Pointers WIMP interface HDD High Density Drive A drive that contains increased storage capacity of bits and or tracks per square inch Home position Accessor axes positioned at 0 vertical and 0 horizontal that serve as the point of reference for the position of other library components Home position is used as a basis for calibration Host In general a host is a computer or program that contains data and provides services to other computers or devices In Fibre Channel terms a host is a com
284. r information Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 151 Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Performing Media Operations Importing Tape Cartridges 152 You can use the I E station to import data cartridges into the library The library s scanner automatically reads the barcode on new cartridges imported into the library Tape cartridges must be present in the I E station and assigned to a partition before you can import them You will select a partition into which to import the cartridges If the selected partition is online it will be taken offline before the import operation is performed and brought back online after the operation is complete If the library contains multiple partitions the import operation will not affect operations in other partitions You must have access to the library s I E station and the operator panel to import cartridges Note All tape cartridges must have a unique external barcode label that is machine readable See Supported Barcode Formats on page 274 and Installing Barcode Labels on page 275 for more information Note If your library has zero I E station slots you cannot import or export media using the I E station See Configuring I E Station Slots on page 62 Note Importing cartridges using the library interface may necessitate performing an inventory on your host application You can also import cartridges using your host application See
285. r something stronger e Do not insert damaged cartridges into tape drives e Do not touch the tape or tape leader Caution Do not degauss cartridges that you intend to reuse Write Protecting Tape Cartridges All tape cartridges have a write protect write inhibit switch to prevent accidental erasure or overwriting of data Before loading a tape cartridge into the library make sure that the write protect switch is positioned correctly either on or off Slide the red or orange write protect switch to the right so that the padlock shows in the closed position The switch is located on the left side of the cartridge front Barcode Label Requirements Cartridges must have an external barcode label that is machine readable Quantum supplied barcode labels provide the best results Barcode labels from other sources can be used but they must meet the following requirements e ANSI MH10 8M 1983 Standard e Type font Code 39 3 of 9 e Characters only uppercase letters A to Z and or numeric values 0 to 9 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 273 Chapter 11 Working With Cartridges and Barcodes Supported Barcode Formats e Number of digits 5 to 15 default for LTO is 6 2 Note A maximum of 12 characters is recommended A barcode label with more than 12 characters may not be printable according to the Code 39 label specifications for the tape cartridge area to which the label is attached T
286. r help line pemounted 15 Memory chipin W The memory in the tape cartridge has Memory chip failed in cartridge failure failed which reduces performance Do not use the cartridge for further write operations cartridge Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 287 Appendix B Tape Alert Flag Descriptions Recommended Application Client No Flag Severity Message Probable Cause 16 Forced eject C The operation has failed because the Manual or forced tape cartridge was manually eject while drive demounted while the tape drive was actively writing or actively writing or reading reading 17 Read only W You have loaded a cartridge of a type Media loaded that is format that is read only in this drive The read only format cartridge will appear as write protected 18 Tape directory W corrupted on load The directory on the tape cartridge has been corrupted File search performance will be degraded The tape directory can be rebuilt by reading all the data on the cartridge Tape drive powered down with tape loaded or permanent error prevented the tape directory being updated 19 Nearing media life The tape cartridge is nearing the end of its calculated life It is recommended that you 1 Use another tape cartridge for your next backup 2 Store this tape cartridge in a safe place in case you need to restore data from it Media may have exceeded its specified nu
287. r i80 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Configuring Scalar Key Manager SKM on the Library regardless of whether a new key or previously used key is applied a single key is still associated with each tape cartridge and quarantine procedures can be applied to just that single key In the example above the same 10 encryption keys can be used to encrypt the same 10 tapes for the lifetime of each tape Configuring Scalar Key Manager SKM on the Library Step 1 Upgrade Firmware Make sure your SKM or KMIP compliant key servers are installed and running before configuring the library see the Sca ar Key Manager User s Guide or your KMIP key manager user s guide for instructions Notes on SKM e Scalar Key Manager is very sensitive to network instability due to the large amount of operations occurring in rapid succession If you get an error stating that an SKM operation failed check network functionality and try the operation again e Make sure ports 80 6000 and 6001 on the SKM servers are opened up in a bi directional mode on all firewalls in your network If they are not the library will not be able to communicate with the SKM servers After your key servers are installed and running follow these steps in order to configure the library Upgrade your library and tape drive firmware to the latest released versions e The minimum library firmware version required for SKM is i2 e The minimum library
288. r slots exist you must modify or delete partitions to free resources For more information see Modifying Partitions on page 55 and Deleting Partitions on page 55 52 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Working With Partitions When the library creates partitions it assigns the first tape drive in the partition as the control path You can change the control paths at any time See Configuring Control Paths on page 66 more information Before creating partitions verify that all tape drives are unloaded and that all cartridges are in their appropriate storage slots For information on unloading tape drives see Unloading Tape Drives on page 161 You can create partitions manually only on the Web client Web Client 1 Select Setup gt Partitions 2 Click Manual 3 Type a name to describe the new partition into the Enter Name text box 4 Select one of the following emulation types from the Emulation Type drop down list e Scalar i40 i80 default e ADIC Scalar i500 e Quantum Scalar i500 e Quantum Scalar i2000 e ADIC Scalar i2000 5 Select one of the following media barcode formats for reporting to host from the Set Media Barcode Format drop down list e Standard Six Six character barcode number with or without a one or two character media ID for example XXXXXX or XXXXXXL4 Only the six character barcode is reported to the host e Plus Six Six
289. rary If the library e mail account address is not configured an error appears For information on setting up the e mail account see Configuring the Library E Mail Account on page 75 You can set up the library to automatically capture and attach a snapshot to specific diagnostic ticket e mail notifications see Configuring the Library E Mail Account on page 75 If the library is in the process of capturing an automatic snapshot you will not be able to manually capture a snapshot via the Web client until the automatic snapshot is complete If this happens an error message will display Wait about 10 minutes and try again You can only capture a snapshot via the Web client Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 253 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Library Not Ready Messages Web Client 1 Select Tools gt Capture Snapshot 2 Select whether to download the file or e mail it to a recipient and click Apply Troubleshooting Library Not Ready Messages Not Ready Messages on the Operator Panel Not Ready Messages on the Web Client If a not ready message displays on the operator panel at startup it means the robot cannot move The library may display a message stating that it did not initialize Try the following steps to resolve the issue e Ifthe not ready message occurs upon initial installation first time out of the box or after a chassis replacement
290. rary Working With Local User Accounts and Passwords Users have access to portions of the Actions Operations and Reports menus Users cannot access the Setup and Tools menus Users can perform functions within a partition such as performing cartridge and tape drive operations but cannot perform operations that affect the physical library such as creating or deleting partitions e On the Web client users can only perform operations and view reports within partitions to which they have been granted access e On the operator panel users can perform actions and view reports for all partitions Service users have access to the entire physical library and all of its partitions as well as to service only functions Each library has only one service user account When a service user logs in all other active users are automatically logged out During or after the initial configuration you can use the default administrator account to create additional local user accounts including other accounts with administrator privileges These administrators can themselves create other local administrator and user accounts Users without administrator privileges cannot create user accounts The library can contain a total of eighteen user administrator accounts including the default administrator account Web Client 1 2 Select Setup gt User Management gt User Accounts Click Create The Create User Account screen displays Enter User
291. re from the Quantum Support web site or browse for a specific firmware file Note The library will be rebooted after the firmware file has been uploaded lf you downgrade library firmware to an earlier version using the firmware upgrade process library configuration settings will be reset to the factory defaults in such case you must manually reconfigure your library settings The firmware was last updated on 04 27 2011 09 22 MDT Currently loaded firmware version on the library 130G TS016 Latest available firmware version from the Quantum Support web site 1306 TS017 Update library firmware with the version from the Quantum Support web site Read EULA Update library firmware with version in this file Browse Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 237 Chapter 9 Updating Firmware Updating Library Firmware Note You can also view a listing of the latest version of library firmware on the following Web site http www quantum com ServiceandSupport SoftwareandDocumentationDownloads S 40 Index aspx and click the Firmware tab View your library s current firmware version by selecting Reports gt About Library from the operator panel or Reports gt About gt Scalar i40 i80 from the Web client 2 Unload tape cartridges from all tape drives installed in the library 3 Capture a library snapshot see Capturing Snapshots of Library Information on page 253 4 Save the library configuration
292. reen contains a list of tape drives assigned to the partition 4 If you have no cleaning slots configured skip this step you will use the top IE station slot as the source for your cleaning cartridge If you have at least one cleaning slot configured you are asked to Select Cleaning Source Select which location to take the cleaning cartridge from e Use the top I E slot Allows you to use a cleaning cartridge from the topmost I E station slot Make sure to install a cleaning cartridge in the topmost I E station slot If manual cartridge assignment is enabled assign the cleaning cartridge to the System partition e Use configured cleaning tapes Allows you to use a cleaning cartridge from a configured cleaning slot If two or more cleaning slots are configured and have cleaning cartridges in them the library chooses which cleaning cartridge to use 5 Select one or more tape drives to clean Note If not all tape drives appear on the screen use the Page 1 of x arrows to view the additional tape drives Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 171 Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Taking a Tape Drive Online or Offline Note Bold column headings in the table can be sorted For example selecting the Location column heading will sort by location coordinates 6 Click Apply 7 Click OK to confirm it is OK to take the partition offline The library moves the cleaning cartridge to the tape drive an
293. ring I E Station Slots the library Under the New Settings column select the time interval at which drives are cleaned 4 Click Apply 5 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Configuring I E Station Slots I E station slots are used to import and export tape cartridges into and out of the library without disrupting normal library operations I E station slots can be configured as either I E station slots or storage slots I E station slots are used to import and export cartridges and are shared by all partitions Storage slots are used to store data cartridges and cleaning cartridges and are assigned to a single partition An IE station that has been configured for storage may contain cleaning slots These cleaning slots must be deleted before you can reconfigure the storage slots as I E station slots You can view the Library Configuration Report to determine how IE slots are configured For more information see Viewing the Library Configuration Report on page 220 For instructions on deleting cleaning slots see Configuring Cleaning Slots on page 59 You cannot configure I E station slots if cartridges are currently loaded in the I E station s Remove all cartridges from the I E station s before attempting the following procedure Each I E station is configured as a complete unit When configuring an IE station all the slots in the I E station are configured the same way The
294. ring the Library E Mail Account on page 75 for more information 128 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 5 Advanced Reporting Viewing the Media Usage Log Viewing the Media Usage Log The Media Usage Log lists information regarding data written and read on the media and lists statistics pertaining to soft and hard read and write errors The media usage log collects information on all media that have ever been in the library including media that are no longer in the library Lifetime media usage metrics are associated with the cartridge and are kept on the embedded cartridge memory The log reflects what the drive reports from the embedded cartridge memory whenever the media is unloaded If the tape cartridge was never mounted and unloaded it will not appear in the log When the log file reaches its maximum size old information is deleted as new information is added This may affect the amount of available historical data The log provides the following information e Volser Media cartridge barcode label e SN Media cartridge serial number e Mfr Media cartridge manufacturer e Date Media cartridge manufacturing date format YYYYMMDD e Type Media type e Mounts Cartridge mount count e RRE Recovered read errors e URE Unrecovered read errors e RWE Recovered write errors e UWE Unrecovered write errors e LW Cartridge lifetime MB written e LR Cartridge lifetime MB read
295. rives to encrypt information being written to and decrypt information being Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 175 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management General Notes About Encryption on the Library read from tape media The library communicates with the encryption key management server s The encryption keys pass through the library so that encryption is transparent to the applications Using the library in this way is known as Library Managed Encryption or LME If you purchase SKM you will receive the software application two servers optional beginning with SKM 1 1 and installation and configuration instructions Installation for KMIP compliant systems differ according to the manufacturer and may include up to 10 key servers Note These two solutions are not interoperable The Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 libraries do not support more than one encryption key management system on a single library This chapter covers e General Notes About Encryption on the Library e About the EKM License e KMIP compliant Encryption Key Management e Configuring Scalar Key Manager SKM on the Library e EKM Path Diagnostics e Viewing Tape Drive Encryption Settings e Installing TLS Certificates on the Library e Performing Scalar Key Manager Functions Available on the Library e Performing KMIP Key Manager Functions on the Library General Notes About Encryption on the Library 176 Keep the following
296. rs are always lower case e A given license key can only be used on the library to which it is assigned and cannot be transferred to another library The key is verified when it is applied to the library to make sure it is the proper key associated with the library serial number e License keys do not expire Once installed on the library license keys cannot be removed unless you replace the library chassis or system control board SCB e Ifyou replace the library chassis The license key is associated with the serial number of the library If you replace your library chassis you must replace all your installed license keys Request replacement license keys from Quantum 68 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Viewing Your License Keys Viewing Installed Licenses Obtaining a License Key Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Adding or Upgrading Licensable Features If you replace the SCB The SCB contains information about your library configuration If you replace your SCB you must reinstall your license key s onto the library You may be able to reinstall them yourself if you have saved the license keys or can retrieve them from the Web sites listed above In some cases factory installed license keys will not be listed on the Web site and you will need to contact Quantum Support for a replacement If you cannot retrieve your license keys or need assistance contact Quantum Support To see the lice
297. ry Information on page 253 5 For Authentication do one of the following e Ifyou do not need to configure login account and password authentication settings clear the Authentication check box Continue with Step 6 e Ifyou need to configure login account and password authentication settings select the Authentication check box The Login Account Password and Confirm Password text boxes display Do the following 76 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Setting Customer Contact Information a Inthe Login Account text box type the name of a valid account on the SMTP server for example john user b In the Password text box type the password for the account that you specified in the Login Account text box c In the Confirm Password text box retype the password to confirm it 6 Click Apply 7 To test the e mail account type an e mail address into the Send a test e mail to text box and click Send e mail Check the e mail account to verify that an e mail message was sent from the library 8 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 SEES ee a a a a Setting Customer Contact Information Administrators can enter contact information into the library for the person who is the primary customer contact for the library Keep this information current to expedite the service process When a problem occurs with the library the conta
298. ryption Key Import Warning Log with EKM License e Tape Drive Log 226 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Cleaning Log Diagnostic Tickets Log Chapter 8 Getting Information About the Library Viewing Saving and E mailing Library Logs The Cleaning Log shows all cleanings that have been performed in the library When the log reaches its maximum size the oldest information is replaced as new information is added The log provides the following information Date Time date and time Barcode barcode of the cleaning cartridge Drive location coordinates of the tape drive that was cleaned mediaSN Media cartridge serial number mediaMfg Media cartridge manufacturer mediaMfgDate Media cartridge manufacturing date format YYYYMMDD Status pass fail Cleaning Type Manual Auto MoveMedium Expired Invalid if the tape is expired or a data tape was improperly used to clean if not applicable and Usage Count N A if the cleaning did not complete Web Client 1 Select Reports gt Log Viewer 2 Select Cleaning Log and press Next The report displays in a new window for viewing 3 You can save or e mail the report following the on screen instructions Note If you want to e mail the log file to a recipient type the recipient s name in the text box next to the E mail button and then click the E mail button You must have your e mail notification configured in order to e mail a log f
299. s 00 00 c cee 33 LDAP Setup Example 000000 eee eae 92 Setup Drive Settings Screen 0 0000 eee 114 Setup Control Path Screen 0 00000 00 ee 115 xiii Tables xiv Figure 17 Figure 18 Figure 19 Figure 20 Figure 21 Figure 22 Figure 23 Figure 24 Figure 25 Figure 26 Figure 27 Figure 28 Figure 29 Figure 30 Figure 31 Figure 32 Figure 33 Figure 34 Figure 35 Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 Figure 39 Figure 40 Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Tools Drive Operations Screen for CPF 116 Force CPF Screen ees 117 Template and Report Data Functions 123 Report Data Buttons 0 0 00 125 Saving and E mailing the Report Data 126 Shutdown in Progress Message 0000005 140 Ready to Power Down Message 0 05 141 Ready to Power Down Message 0 45 141 Series of Restart Messages 0 000 eee ee 142 E Station Unlocked Message 000 0000 146 IE Station Locked Message 20000 eee ue 147 Magazine Unlocked Message 20000005 149 Magazine Locked Timer Message 045 149 Magazine Release Latch Access 20000055 151 Configuring Encryption Settings and Key Server Addressee is poc aoe Seve eee tee Rese Gwe t AeS 181 Configuring Partition Encryption 184 Enabling Automatic EKM Path Diagnostics 188 Tools TLS Communication C
300. s 112 The Advanced Reporting license provides the following library features Control Path Failover CPF Provides support for configuring the LTO 5 or LTO 6 Fibre Channel FC drive for control path failover To configure a control path failover drive you must also have an Advanced Reporting license When control path failover is used one drive is assigned as the primary control path and another drive as the control path failover secondary drive The control path failover drive is used whenever the primary control path drive fails or is inoperable Reports Listed below are Advanced Reporting report names You can view configure send via e mail and save and reuse report configurations as templates In addition you can automatically e mail any of the reports to designated recipients at specified scheduled times Drive Resource Utilization Report Provides tape drive usage information showing you which tape drives are working at optimum capacity and which are under utilized This report can help you allocate your tape drive resources properly e Media Integrity Analysis Report Provides TapeAlert count for various combinations of tape drives tape cartridges and TapeAlert flags This report can help you determine if a problem is due to a specific tape drive or tape cartridge Logs Listed below are available logs e Media Security Log Lists media that has been removed from the library e Media Usage Log Lists
301. s regardless of the day or time If you have duplicate recipients make sure that the reports selected in each entry are not an exact match For example if you have one entry in which Recipient A receives the Drive Utilization and Media Integrity reports on Monday you cannot create another entry to send Recipient A the Drive Utilization and Media Integrity reports on Thursday Instead you can create one entry for Recipient A and send the reports every day select Daily as the day to send the report or you can change the reports you are sending so that they are not the same as the first entry You could create three entries for Recipient A as follows 1 send both reports out on Monday 2 send Drive Utilization out on Thursday and 3 send Media Integrity out on Thursday in a different entry The recipient is the same but the reports sent in each entry are different Each e mail notification includes an optional comment text box you can use to enter information about the library or the reports and logs that you want the recipient to know This information appears in the body of the e mail You can modify the settings of an existing e mail notification at any time after it is created If an e mail notification is no longer needed you can delete it Administrators can configure the library e mail account and e mail notifications Users with user privileges can receive e mail notifications but they cannot configure the library e mail
302. s 2003 servers only Install Windows Support Tools on the Windows 2003 server as follows a Go to www microsoft com and search for windows server 2003 support tools sp2 or click on the following link http www microsoft com downloads details aspx FamilyID 96a3501 1 fd83 419d 939b 9a772ea2df90 amp DisplayLang en b Download both support cab and suptools msi c Run suptools msi to begin installation 4 Create a computer account in Active Directory e Do not select any of the check boxes during creation e The account name will be used for lt computer account gt fields shown in the following steps 5 At the command prompt map SPN to the computer account Use the following format setspn A library lt fqdn of library gt lt computer account gt For example setspn A library delos dvt mycompany com kerbtest 6 At the command prompt create the keytab file for the SPN Use one of the following formats e For Windows 2003 ktpass out library keytab princ library lt fqdn of library gt lt realm gt rndPass ptype KRB5_NT_SRV_HST crypto RC4 HMAC NT mapUser lt realm gt computers lt computer account gt Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 95 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Setting the Session Timeout For example ktpass out library keytab princ library delos dvt mycompany com OURREALM LOCAL rndPass ptype KRB5_NT_SRV_HST crypto RC4 HMAC NT mapUser ourrealm local
303. s are met For example an error trap tests for an error condition and provides a recovery routine User ID An alphanumeric value that the password database associates with a login name Also UID UTC Coordinated Universal Time The world wide standard for time commonly considered to be the equivalent of Greenwich Mean Time and Zulu time For all of these time standards zero 0 hours is midnight in Greenwich England which lies on the zero longitudinal meridian The sequence of the letters in the acronym is a compromise between the English and French terms Temps Universel Coordonn WORM Write Once Read Many A common type of data storage medium in which data can be read and reread but not altered after it has been recorded WWNN World Wide Node Name A unique number assigned by a recognized naming authority The world wide name is integral to Fibre Channel operations Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 305 Glossary WWPN World Wide Port Name The WWPN is a 64 bit hard coded address for each port on an FC connected device It is used to identify available SAN devices at end points X X axis X position The horizontal position of the library s robotic arm Y Y axis Y position The vertical position of the library s robotic arm 306 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide A aborting an operation 25 About Library 216 administrator privileges 80 advanced reporting 13 2
304. s not installed properly you cannot configure the network settings Install one end of the Ethernet cable in the left most Ethernet port of the system control board SCB located on the back of the library see Figure 4 or Figure 5 on page 10 Make sure the other end of the Ethernet cable is installed in the appropriate LAN port on your LAN You can configure the following network settings e Library Host Name DHCP e IP Addresses e Default Gateway Subnet Mask Network Prefix and DNS Addresses Some settings are only available on the Web client others are only available on the operator panel as described below Library Host Name The host name is the network name you want to assign to the library The host name is limited to 12 lowercase alphanumeric characters and dashes You can view but not modify the host name on the operator panel To modify the host name you must use the Web client Web Client 1 Select Setup gt Network Management gt Network 2 Type a name in the Host Name field and click Apply Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 39 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Configuring Network Settings IP Addresses 40 DHCP is enabled by default When DHCP is enabled the library obtains an IP address automatically If DHCP is disabled you must manually enter an IP address default gateway and subnet mask net prefix You can enable disable DHCP from the operator panel or Web cl
305. s to select a cleaning cartridge to export You may also select ALL to export all cleaning cartridges however the ALL option is only available if there are enough empty slots in the I E station to accommodate all the cleaning cartridges 3 Press Export The library moves the selected cleaning cartridge to an I E station slot Web Client 1 Select Operations gt Cleaning Media gt Export The Operations Export Cleaning Media screen displays This screen contains a list of the cleaning cartridges in the library The media barcode location coordinates media type and cleaning status usable expired are displayed for each cartridge 2 Note the number of empty I E station slots that appear in the Empty I E Station Slots field on the right side of the screen The number of cleaning cartridges you can export is limited to the number of empty I E station slots 3 Select one or more cleaning cartridges to export An error displays if the number of selected cleaning cartridges is more than the number of empty cleaning slots Note If not all cartridges appear on the screen use the Page 1 of x arrows to view the additional cartridges Note Bold column headings in the table can be sorted For example selecting the Location column heading will sort by location coordinates 4 Click Apply The library moves the selected cleaning cartridge to an I E station slot Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 169 Ch
306. se To learn more about the EKM license refer to Encryption Key Management on page 14 Lists keys that failed the most recent data key import operation This log is only available if you are running Scalar Key Manager SKM For detailed information about this log see Using the SKM Encryption Key Import Warning Log on page 210 Web Client 1 Select Reports gt Log Viewer 2 Select SKM Encryption Key Import Warning Log and press Next 3 The report displays in a new window for viewing 4 You can save or e mail the report following the on screen instructions Note If you want to e mail the log file to a recipient type the recipient s name in the text box next to the E mail button and then click the E mail button You must have your e mail account configured in order to e mail a log file See Configuring the Library E Mail Account on page 75 for more information The library allows you to retrieve tape drive logs using the Web client Tape drive log information can be used to help troubleshoot the library the tape drive sled and tape drive issues Since the log retrieval process can take up to 30 minutes the tape drive and associated partition are automatically taken offline during the operation and brought back online when the operation completes You will be asked to confirm that you want to take the tape drive and partition offline Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 229 Chapter 8 Gett
307. sed in Enabling SNMP Versions on page 44 104 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Configuring Security Settings SSL Allows you to enable Secure Socket Layer SSL for secure data transmission between the library and remote clients This setting is disabled by default Enabling SSL encrypts all Web browser connections to the Web client and it enables SSL based authentication for SMI S SMI S is the newest standard of SNMP which makes sets of data continuously available For more information about SMI S on the library see SMI S on page 100 Disabling SSL creates an unencrypted connection from a Web browser to the Web client See the Quantum Intelligent Libraries SMI S Reference Guide 6 01317 xx for further configuration and access details Note Before enabling SSL make sure you enter a name for the library in the Host Name text box when configuring network settings Setup gt Network Management gt Network on the Web client see Library Host Name on page 39 After enabling SSL use that host name to access the library If you do not use that name you will receive a security alert In addition make sure to complete all the text boxes listed on the Web client Contact Information screen Setup gt Notification gt Contact Information before enabling SSL This information is used to identify company information in the SSL certificate Operator Panel 1 Select Set
308. shooting Running the IVT Diagnostic Subtests Individually Robotics Tape Drive and Magazine Tests e A scratch tape must be in the top I E station slot The scratch tape must be assigned to the System partition The scratch tape must be compatible with all unloaded tape drives installed in the library For a list of supported media see Supported Media on page 283 Operator Panel 1 Make sure the prerequisites listed in Prerequisites for Running IVT on page 263 are met 2 Select Tools gt IVT A message displays telling you that partitions will be turned offline and all Web client users will be logged out 3 Press Yes to set partitions offline log users off the Web client and continue with the test The library conducts a series of prerequisite checks to be sure everything is in order Each prerequisite is listed as the library checks it If something is not set up correctly to run the IVT the operator panel displays a message letting you know how to fix it Once you fix the issue again select Tools gt IVT If all is in order the test begins 4 When the test completes if any of the three subtests fails check the library diagnostic tickets to help determine and resolve the problem Running the IVT Diagnostic Subtests Individually Robotics Tape Drive and Magazine Tests If you do not need to run the full IVT you can run the robotics tape drive or magazine test separately to check an individual component
309. sions xxvii Chapter 1 Description 1 OVEIWIEW s epei rarer EREEREER E tee ae AKRA ene ee ee a 1 Library Components a cesis oe e edra iiea kann eee 2 Front Panel osagaia TEE D nag eG ERDER 2 Robotic System and Barcode Scanner 02 005 3 MaQazin S cc caek a aa ee eee aa aa ap i 4 Power Supply si taas i osas caraidean iiia a be 8 System Control Board a 8 Tape Drives eee 9 Standard Features suauu aaea 11 User Interface 2 eee eee 11 Partition Saana eter chetete Peso he ce ket beet eee eee eee 11 Control Path Modification 00000 eee eae 11 Support for WORM 000 eee eae 12 Licensable Features 0 0 00 0 eee 12 Capacity on Demand COD 0 ees 12 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide iii Contents Advanced Reporting 0 000 cence eee eee 13 Encryption Key Management 00200 eee ee 14 Chapter 2 Unpacking the Library 15 SSS SSS SSS SS eee Chapter 3 Understanding the User Interface 19 Operator Panel 0 0000 cee 19 Operator Panel Layout and Functions 20 Navigating and Editing on the Operator Panel 25 Web Cent seisena at ata dakka i a i i mei aaa a aAA aa a ai 26 WipS sic irnead tasar piak Spee begs oh a N 26 Sorting Information in Tables ananasa 27 Web Client Layout and Functions 000 27 Web Client Home Page 0 0c eee eee 29
310. st see Setting the Time Zone on page 48 the library automatically adjusts for daylight saving time There is no need to manually reset the clock for time changes However if you set a custom time zone the library will not automatically adjust for daylight saving time You must enable the Use Custom Daylight Saving Time setting Once enabled you can set start and stop times to an accuracy of one minute You can only set daylight saving time on the Web client Web Client 1 Select Setup gt Date amp Time 2 Refer to the library Web client online help for detailed instructions To view the help click the Help icon in the upper right corner of the screen eA Working With Partitions Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Partitions are virtual sections within a library that present the appearance of multiple separate libraries for purposes of file management access by multiple users or dedication to one or more host applications The library must contain at least one unassigned tape drive and slot to create a partition 49 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Working With Partitions There are two ways to create partitions e Automatically Library resources are assigned proportionately among the partitions Tape drives are grouped according to their interface type Fibre Channel or SAS and media generation LTO 4 LTO 5 LTO 6 When you automatically create partitions you add to the number of existing
311. stem Configuration EKM Path Diagnostics Set up the encryption key management server access for library managed encryption Host names may be entered if DNS is configured otherwise enter IPv4 or IPv6 addresses only Note These server settings are only applicable when a partition s encryption method is set to library managed encryption see Setup gt Encryption gt Partition Configuration Key Server Type SKM X Automatic EKM Path Diagnostics V Enabled Interval 10 SSL TLS Connection Enabled 1 10 20 170 88 6000 2 10 20 170 89 6000 Click here to run EKM Path Diagnostics SEIN 188 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Viewing Tape Drive Encryption Settings Viewing Tape Drive Encryption Settings You can view the encryption settings in the following ways e System Information Report To view encryption information on all key servers partitions and tape drives select Reports gt System Information from the Web client For more information see Viewing System Information on page 216 Library Configuration Report To view the encryption status of a selected tape drive or tape cartridge select Reports gt Library Configuration from the Web client and click a tape drive or slot The encryption status is displayed in a pop up status window For more information see Viewing the Library Configuration Report on page 220 e Partition Encryption From t
312. storage slots to empty I E station slots for removal from the library Details on exporting cartridges include Exporting cartridges using the library Web client may necessitate performing an inventory on your host application If the host application has issued a prevent media removal command to the library you will not be able to use the library Web client to export cartridges In addition you can export cartridges using your host application For more information see your host application documentation If the partition is online it will be taken offline before the export is performed and brought back online after the export is complete You will be asked to confirm that you want to take the partition offline If your library has zero I E station slots you cannot export cartridges See Configuring I E Station Slots on page 62 If you have AutoClean enabled you can also export cleaning cartridges For information see Exporting Cleaning Cartridges on page 168 You can select only the partitions to which you have been given access You can only export cartridges if empty I E station slots are available You must have access to the library s I E station and the operator panel to export cleaning cartridges Caution Some host applications may fail import export operations when the I E station contains cartridges that are assigned to another partition Move cartridges from the I E station as soon as possible to avo
313. t Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 225 Chapter 8 Getting Information About the Library Viewing Saving and E mailing Library Logs e Encryption The encryption state of the media in the slot In order for the library to know the encryption state the tape must have been placed into an encryption capable tape drive in the library The encryption capable tape drive reads and records the encryption state of the tape and the encryption state displays as Encrypted or Not Encrypted If the tape was not placed into an encryption capable tape drive in the library or if the slot is empty the encryption state displays as Unknown e Get Count The number of times the picker successfully removed a tape from the slot e Get Retries The number of times the picker had to perform a recovery operation to remove a tape from the slot e Put Count The number of times the picker successfully placed a tape into the slot e Put Retries The number of times the picker had to perform a recovery operation to place a tape into the slot Web Client Select Reports gt All Slots Viewing Saving and E mailing Library Logs You can view save and e mail several logs containing information about the library e Cleaning Log e Diagnostic Tickets Log e Media Security Log available only with Advanced Reporting license e Media Usage Log available only with Advanced Reporting license e SKM Enc
314. t Setup gt Security Services gt Network IF 2 Press Modify 3 Use the Up and Down buttons to select Enabled or Disabled and press Apply Make another selection or press Exit 5 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration 102 on page 106 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide SSH Services Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Configuring Security Settings Enables or disables Secure Shell SSH services such as SSH from accessing the library This setting is enabled by default Operator Panel 1 Select Setup gt Security Services gt SSH Services 2 Press Modify 3 Use the Up and Down buttons to select Enabled or Disabled and press Apply 4 Make another selection or press Exit 5 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Enables or disables external attempts to discover the library by pinging it by means of the ICMP Echo packets This setting is enabled by default You may disable this feature if you are using IPv4 but you should NOT do so if you are using IPv6 Disabling this feature disables all IPv6 communication on the Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 There will be no error messages and the library will appear to be working but it will not be communicating Caution Do NOT disable ICMP if you are using IPv6 Operator Panel 1 Select Setup gt Security Ser
315. t list media that moves from one location to another within the library 126 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Configuring Media Security Chapter 5 Advanced Reporting Working with the Media Security Log The log file contains the following information e Date and time of media removal e Tape cartridge barcode e Type of removal expected or unexpected e Slot location coordinates of the slot the cartridge is missing from e Slot type I E storage or cleaning When the log file reaches its maximum size the oldest information is replaced as new information is added You can access and configure this log from only the Web client You can choose to collect data in a log to list the following conditions that occur in your library e Unexpected removal of media after a power up and reboot e Unexpected removal of media during library operation e Expected removal of media from IE Slots during library operation Once configured the library issues diagnostic tickets for the selected conditions and collects the media removal conditions in the logs To configure the Media Security do the following You can only access this report from the Web client Web Client 1 Select Setup gt Notifications gt Advanced Reporting gt Media Security The Setup Advanced Reporting Media Security screen displays 2 Click to enable any or all of the options e Unexpected Removal Detection After Power Up and Reboot Only
316. t of and behind the library for proper air flow Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 279 Appendix A Specifications Library Power Specifications Library Power Specifications Scalar i40 Scalar i80 Line voltage 100 240 VAC 100 240 VAC Line frequency 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz Rated AC Input Current 100 Volt 2 8 Amps 100 Volt 5 0 Amps 240 Volt 1 4 Amps 240 Volt 2 5 Amps Typical Power Consump 100 watts 200 watts tion A Scalar i80 library with dual power supplies will have these requirement on both AC inputs to the library but will load share the current draw equally between each supply and from each AC connection 280 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Appendix A Specifications Power Consumption and Heat Output T Power Consumption and Heat Output Typical library power consumption watts hour and heat output BTU hour are listed below The values listed below are average not peak or maximum values Typical Power Typical Heat Consumption Output BTU Component Watts Hour Hour Scalar i40 library minimum configuration 18 61 no tape drives installed random robot movement Scalar i40 library maximum configuration 70 239 two 2 tape drives writing Scalar i80 library minimum configuration 18 61 no tape drives installed one power supply random robot movement Scalar i80 library maximum configuration 159 544 five 5
317. tape drives writing two power supplies LTO 4 tape drive writing one power supply 24 82 no robot movement LTO 5 tape drive writing one power supply 30 102 no robot movement LTO 6 tape drive writing one power supply 43 148 no robot movement Second power supply Scalar i80 7 24 The difference in power consumption and heat output between Fibre Channel and SAS tape drives is negligible Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 281 Appendix A Specifications Communication Interfaces Communication Interfaces Library Control Logical Unit Number LUN Connectivity Native drive interface FC SAS Library Management Operator panel Web client SNMP protocol SMI S protocol Supported Tape Drives Media Vendor Generation Interface Type Speed Connector HP LTO 4 Fibre Channel 4 Gb s LC SAS 3 Gb s SFF 8088 HP LTO 5 Fibre Channel 8 Gb s LC SAS 6 Gb s SFF 8088 HP LTO 6 Fibre Channel 8 Gb s LC SAS 6 Gb s SFF 8088 IBM LTO 4 Fibre Channel 4 Gb s LC SAS 3 Gb s SFF 8482 IBM LTO 5 Fibre Channel 8 Gb s LC SAS 6 Gb s SFF 8482 282 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Appendix A Specifications Supported Media Media Vendor Generation Interface Type Speed Connector IBM LTO 6 Fibre Channel 8 Gb s LC SAS 6 Gb s SFF 8482 Supported Media Cartridge Type Access LTO 6
318. tarting the library brings them back online The reboot takes approximately 5 minutes Operator Panel 1 Make sure the connected host applications are not sending commands to the library and that all library operations have stopped 2 Press Actions gt Shutdown gt Restart Library Press Yes to confirm 4 Several messages appear on the screen in the order shown in Figure 25 Do not do anything in response to these messages The library will restart and initialize on its own Restart Librar aral minutes ze patient Restart in Progress May tal several minut Do not e OFF libre will re Library is Initializing BM please wait Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Turning Off the Library Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Shutting Down Restarting Turning Off and Removing Power Web Client 1 Make sure the connected host applications are not sending commands to the library and that all library operations have stopped 2 Press Operations gt System Shutdown 3 Select Restart and click Apply 4 Press OK to confirm 5 Several messages appear on the operator in the order shown in Figure 25 on page 142 Do not do anything in response to these messages The library will restart and initialize on its own Turning OFF the library means pressing the power button on the front panel It is recommended that you perform a shutdown via the Web client or operator panel before turni
319. terface 149 Releasing Magazines Manually 0000 150 Performing Media Operations 00 000 c ce eee eee 151 Importing Tape Cartridges 00000 eee eee 152 Bulk Loading Tape Cartridges 00002 eee aes 155 Moving Tape Cartridges 0 000 c eee eee 156 Exporting Tape Cartridges 0000s eee eee 158 Loading Tape Drives 0 000 cece eee 160 Unloading Tape Drives 00 000 cece eee 161 Cleaning Tape Drives 0 20 0000 cece 163 Valid Cleaning Cartridges 00 00 e eee eee 164 About AutoClean 0 00000 cc ee 165 Enabling AutoClean 00 00 165 Importing Cleaning Cartridges 002000 eee 166 Exporting Cleaning Cartridges 020 eee eee 168 Manually Cleaning Tape Drives 02000 eee 170 Taking a Tape Drive Online or Offline 0 0000 172 Chapter 7 viii Encryption Key Management 175 General Notes About Encryption on the Library 176 About the EKM License 00000 ee 177 KMIP compliant Encryption Key Management 177 About Key Reuse 0 0 0 eee 178 Configuring Scalar Key Manager SKM on the Library 179 Step 1 Upgrade Firmware 00 00 eeeeeeee 179 Step 2 Install the EKM License Key on the Library 180 Step 3 Prepare Partitions for Library Managed Encryption 180 Step 4 Configure Encryption Settings and
320. ternet Browsers on page 283 To access the library from a remote location the library must be connected to your network via an Ethernet connection Simply enter the library s IP address in your Internet browser bar to access the Web client See Configuring Network Settings on page 38 for information on setting the network configuration settings for remote use Keep the following tips in mind when using the Web client e You must disable Web browser popup blockers to use the Web client interface and the library s online Help Add the Scalar i40 or Scalar i80 s Internet Protocol IP address to the list of trusted allowed sites on your Scalar i40 or Scalar i80 supported browser so the Web client pages will automatically refresh e Do not use your Internet browser Back button to navigate the Web client pages Instead use the buttons provided within the Web client Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 3 Understanding the User Interface Web Client e Optimum screen resolution for viewing using a Windows operating system is 96 DPI If your resolution is set higher certain screen messages may not display as intended To change screen resolution show the desktop right click to display the Properties window and click Settings gt Advanced e Log out of the library before closing the Internet browser window when you are using the Web client If you do not log out the session will remain open Clicking the
321. the library the key used to encrypt it will not be exported If a tape cartridge is missing its label the key used to encrypt it will not be exported e Export Selective Exports only the key s associated with a string of characters that you type into the text box Each key is associated with its encrypted tape cartridge identified by the tape cartridge barcode You can type in all or part of a tape cartridge barcode and any keys that are associated with that string will be exported This is helpful if you only want to export a single key associated with a particular tape cartridge 5 Click Apply All the exported keys are saved to a single encryption key file 6 A Save As dialog box opens allowing you to save the encryption key file to a location on your computer Choose a location and click Save Importing Data SKM servers provide a unique encryption key for each tape cartridge Encryption Keys that is encrypted In order to read tapes encrypted by a different i e source SKM server you need to import the encryption keys used to encrypt those tapes onto your SKM server i e destination Note This function is available to administrators and only applies to SKM servers Both SKM servers must be connected and operational in order to import encryption keys To import encryption keys 1 Before starting this process read and follow the sequence of steps outlined in Sharing Encrypted Tape Cartridges on page 203 2
322. this order 1 topmost I E station slot and 2 one of the configured cleaning slots If you have zero cleaning slots configured you must use a cleaning cartridge in the topmost I E station slot If manual cartridge assignment is enabled assign the cleaning cartridge to the System partition The associated partition is taken offline during the operation and brought back online when the operation completes You will be asked to confirm that you want to take the partition offline When the operation is complete the library moves the cleaning cartridge back to the I E station slot or cleaning slot You can clean tape drives manually at any time using commands on the operator panel or the Web client Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Cleaning Tape Drives Operator Panel 1 Select Actions gt Tape Drive gt Manual Cleaning 2 If more than one tape drive is in the library use the Up and Down buttons to select a tape drive to clean then press Clean 3 When the operation completes press OK Web Client 1 Select Tools gt Drive Operations 2 Select Clean a tape drive and click Next 3 If more than one partition exists select the partition that contains the tape drive you want to clean and click Next The Clean Drive Partition Vode screen displays where Partition is the name of the partition and Mode is the current mode online offline of the partition This sc
323. three digits as follows Magazine Column Slot Figure 2 and Figure 3 show the magazines and list all of the location coordinates e Magazine Library magazine level is represented by the first digit of a library coordinate In a Scalar i40 there is only one level of magazine The coordinate is always zero In a Scalar i80 library the bottom magazines are indicated by a zero the top magazines are indicated by the number 1 e Column A storage column is a group of slots arranged vertically in the library Columns are represented by the second digit of a library coordinate Columns are identified relative to the front left of the library The column in the front left of the library is number 1 The column numbering continues around the library in a clockwise direction The I E station column is always number 8 e Slot Slots both storage and I E station are represented by the third digit of the library location coordinate Within each magazine column slots are numbered from 1 to 5 starting at the top of the magazine Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 5 Chapter 1 Description Library Components Figure 2 Scalar i40 Internal Layout and Magazine Slot Location Coordinates Tape Drives Robot on Y tray ms KI Right magazine P Left magazine Left Magazine Right Magazine Front Back Front Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 1 Descripti
324. tilizar este producto lea todas las instrucciones y advertencias en ADVERTENCIA este documento y en la Guia informativa sobre sistema seguridad y normas VARNING L s alla anvisningar och varningar i detta dokument och i System s kerhet och krav fr n myndigheter Informationshandbok innan denna produkt tas i bruk Taking ESD Precautions Some components within the Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 libraries contain static sensitive parts To avoid damaging these parts while performing installation procedures always observe the following precautions e Use an antistatic wrist strap If you do not have one touch the outside of the library on the sheet metal before touching any components to discharge static from your body e Keep static sensitive parts in their original shipping containers until ready for installation Look for the ESD sticker to identify static sensitive parts e Avoid touching connectors and other components Note Dry climates and cold weather heating environments have lower relative humidity and are more likely to produce static electricity Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide xxiii Preface Related Documents The following Quantum documents are also available for Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 systems Document No Document Title 6 66546 xx Scalar 140 and Scalar i80 Quick Start Guide 6 66547 xx Scalar 140 and Scalar i80 Release Notes 6 00618 xx System
325. tion if installing Client Certificate File Quantum Client Certificate Password Use Admin s Password supplied TLS certificates Use the Quantum Certificate Bundle J Quantum Communication Certificate Bundle File Browse _ Tells you whether TES t__________ 65 communication certificates are currently installed on the library certificates Type zA Serial Number Valid Between Dates Status Issuer and Subject are currently May 1 17 45 39 2009 GMT Issuer C US S CA L SAN JOSE O QUANTUM OU MFG CN QKM CA installed on Roo bray AC3141FD4627D May 1 17 45 39 2019 G Subject C US S CA L SAN JOSE O QUANTUM OU MFG CN QKM CA Issuer C US S CA L SAN JOSE O QUANTUM OU MFG CN QKM CA the library Client Library May 1 19 01 53 2009 GMT atig __ C US S CA L SAN JOSE O QUANTUM OU QKM CN QKM CLIENT May 1 19 01 53 2019 GMT Subject Cre Issuer C US S CA L SAN JOSE O QUANTUM OU MFG CN QKM CA lAdmin Library F2 May 1 13 01 52 2009 GMT aiid C US S CA L SAN JOSE O QUANTUM OU akm_admin CN QKM May 1 19 01 52 2019 G Subject ADMIN 000081 Primary May 1 1745 39 2009 GMT Issuer C US S CA L SAN JOSE O QUANTUM OU MFG CN QKM CA oct Femay acatstro4sa7D May 1 17 45 39 2019 GMT 2 4 subject C US 5 CA L SAN JOSE O QUANTUM OU MFG CN QKM CA Issuer C US S CA L SAN JOSE O QUANTUM OU MFG CN QKM CA Sewer Piman 5B Maelo o 200 ee and C US S CA L SAN JOSE 0 QUANTUM OU QKM CN QKM TLS Server May 1 19 01 08 2019 G Subject 000031 Secondary May 1 17 45 39 2009 G
326. tional Conventions This manual uses the following conventions Convention Example File and directory names menu commands button names and window names are shown in bold font data upload Menu names separated by arrows indicate a sequence of menus to be navigated Utilities gt Firmware The following formats indicate important information Note Note emphasizes important information related to the main topic Caution Caution indicates potential hazards to equipment or data WARNING Warning indicates potential hazards to personal safety e Right side of the system Refers to the right side as you face the component being described e Left side of the system Refers to the left side as you face the component being described Product Safety Quantum will not be held liable for damage arising from unauthorized Statements use of the product The user assumes all risk in this aspect This unit is engineered and manufactured to meet all safety and regulatory requirements Be aware that improper use may result in bodily injury damage to the equipment or interference with other equipment The System Safety and Regulatory Information Guide is located on the Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 documentation website http www quantum com ServiceandSupport SoftwareandDocumentationDownloads SI40 Index aspx Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide xxi
327. tions Performing Media Operations Moving Tape Cartridges 156 Before bulk loading print out the Library Configuration report from the Web client to see how the physical slots of the library are configured The report shows what slots are unavailable or configured as cleaning slots or as I E station slots For information on accessing the report see Viewing the Library Configuration Report on page 220 Place cartridges in their appropriately configured slot location for example cleaning cartridges should not be placed in slots configured for storage To perform an initial bulk load remove the magazine and manually insert tape cartridges directly into storage slots see Releasing Magazines on page 148 When finished loading the cartridges reinstall the magazine and push it in until it is completely closed After the initial bulk load you can use the Import Media screen to add cartridges without interrupting library operations as long as I E station slots have been configured For more information see Importing Tape Cartridges on page 152 Once a cartridge has been imported into a library and assigned to a partition it can be moved to a tape drive for data access to a storage slot for storage or back to the I E station for removal from the library Details on using the library to move media include e If your library has zero I E station slots you cannot move cartridges to and from the I E station See Configuring
328. total slots full slots total I E station slots full occupied I E station slots and encryption method Chassis The following information is provided for each chassis manufacturer model and serial number Saving and E mailing the Library Configuration Record The library configuration record is a text file that contains details about the library s configuration The configuration record can be saved or e mailed to a specified e mail address Information in the library The configuration record includes 222 Product information Vendor model product ID product version library firmware version and serial number License information License keys installed and descriptions installation date and expiration date Primary Network Information Host Name DHCP enabled disabled IP address netmask gateway Ethernet MAC Ethernet link speed Mbits s and Ethernet link present Chassis information Manufacturer model serial number and location Tape drive information e Fibre Channel FC tape drives Partition name number of tape drives in partition drive location SCSI element address online status active status ready state vendor model form factor serial number firmware version drive type logical serial number interface type World Wide WWN loop ID topology actual topology speed and actual speed Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Saving the Configuration Record
329. tridge is not data grade The drive has not Any data you write to the tape is at risk been able to read the Replace the cartridge with a data grade MRS stripes tape 9 Write protect C You are trying to write to a write Write command is protected cartridge Remove the write attempted to a write protection or use another tape protected tape 10 Media removal You cannot eject the cartridge because Manual or software prevented the tape drive is in use Wait until the unload attempted operation is complete before ejecting when prevent media the cartridge removal on 11 Cleaning media The tape in the drive is a cleaning Cleaning cartridge cartridge loaded into drive 12 Unsupported You have tried to load a cartridge of a Attempted load of format type which is not supported by this unsupported tape drive format 13 Recoverable C The operation has failed because the Tape snapped cut or mechanical tape in the drive has experienced a other cartridge cartridge mechanical failure mechanical failure in failure 1 Discard the old tape the drive where 2 Restart the operation with a different mediume anpe demounted tape 14 Unrecoverable C The operation has failed because the Tape snapped cut or mechanical tape in the drive has experienced a other cartridge cartridge mechanical failure mechanical failure in failure 1 Do not attempt to extract the tape the drive where cartridge medium cannot be 2 Call the tape drive supplie
330. tronic Equipment This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product should not be disposed of with your other waste Instead it should be handed over to a designated collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling please visit our website at http qcare quantum com or contact your local government authority your household waste disposal service or the business from which you purchased the product Batterij niet weggooien maar inleveren Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 295 Appendix C Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment 296 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Glossary Numerals 1U 2U 3U etc Racks manufactured for mounting computer hardware often define vertical space as units The components that are mounted in the racks are defined by how many units of rack space they require For example the height of a unit in a rack is 1 75 inches If a component is 5 25 inches in thickness the component is said to be a 3U component gt Arbitrated loop A Fibre Channel configuration that attaches multiple co
331. ts in the Progress Window This may take several minutes If a test fails try the solutions listed under Failure Scenarios on page 187 4 Do one of the following e If Completed appears in the Progress Window the diagnostics were performed this does not mean that the diagnostics passed just that the diagnostics were performed Click Close to close the Progress Window e If Failure appears in the Progress Window the diagnostics were not able to be performed Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 187 Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management EKM Path Diagnostics Enabling Automatic You can enable the library to automatically perform EKM Path EKM Path Diagnostics Diagnostics at selected intervals During each interval the library tests every configured key server The default test interval is 10 minutes The library generates a diagnostic ticket if there are problems Automatic EKM Path Diagnostics is enabled by default and should always be left enabled You should not need to disable it unless Quantum Support directs you to do so For a list of tests performed see EKM Path Diagnostics on page 186 To enable Automatic EKM Path Diagnostics 1 From the Web client select Setup gt Encryption gt System Configuration see Figure 33 2 Select the Automatic EKM Path Diagnostics check box 3 Select a test interval from the Interval drop down list Figure 33 Enabling Automatic 4 Setup Encryption Sy
332. uantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide E P Chapter 3 n Understanding the User i Interface The user interface for the Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 libraries is available in two formats the operator panel and the Web client Operations on the library can be performed locally on the operator panel or remotely on your computer using the Web client Both the operator panel and the Web client are required to operate the library Some functionality is only available through the Web client and some functionality is only available through the operator panel However it is recommended that you use the Web client rather than the operator panel to perform most library operations This chapter covers e Operator Panel e Web Client e Menu Trees Operator Panel The operator panel is located on the front panel of the physical library The operator panel screen contains a menu bar with operations that correspond to the four physical buttons below it The menu operations and button functions change with each screen Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 19 Chapter 3 Understanding the User Interface Operator Panel Operator Panel Layout and Functions Figure 8 Operator Panel User Interface Home Screen Title bar The operator panel home screen refreshes every 5 seconds to provide up to date information about library performance You can choose your desired operator panel home screen that displays o
333. ulk loading 155 exporting 158 importing 152 moving 156 proper handling 272 storing 272 unassigned 153 write protecting 273 tape drives autoleveling 240 cleaning about 163 cleaning automatically 165 cleaning manual 170 description 9 loading 160 location coordinates 9 log 229 online offline 172 paramaters configuring 64 reports 231 resetting 268 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide test 264 display 29 unloading 161 home page 28 29 TCP 43 WORM 12 test LDAP 93 write protecting cartridges 273 tests installation and verification IVT 262 magazine 264 random move 266 robotics 264 robotics get put 269 tape drive 264 ticket indicator LED 3 time zone setting 48 time setting 47 timeout 96 TLS certificates installing 183 traps 44 troubleshooting 247 turning off 139 143 U UDP 43 unassigned tape cartridges importing 153 unload assist 97 unloading tape drives 161 unlocking the I E station 145 unpacking the library 15 updating library firmware 235 user name default 80 136 user privileges 81 W Web client description 26 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Index 311 Index 312 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide
334. umber of I E slots that are full Changes to the home screen can be made only from the operator panel Refer to Figure 9 on page 21 Changing to Alternate 1 Select Setup gt System Settings and press Select Home Screen 2 Select Alternate Home and press Modify 3 Select Up to choose Unlock I E and press Apply 4 Select Exit twice to return to the alternate home screen Note From the alternate home screen selecting Menu returns you to the default home screen To return to the alternate home screen select Actions gt Alternate Home and press Select The Alternate Home Screen as shown in Figure 9 displays 108 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Changing Operator Panel Home Screen View Unlocking the I E is described in Unlocking and Opening the I E Station on page 145 Returning to Default 1 From the alternate home screen select Menu to return to the Home Screen default home screen The default home screen is displayed temporarily however upon power cycle will display the alternate home screen until reset permanently 2 To reset to view the default home screen permanently select Setup gt System Settings and press Select 3 Select Alternate Home and press Modify 4 Select Down and press Apply Select Exit twice to return to the default home screen Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 109 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Changing
335. up gt Security Services gt SSL 2 Press Modify 3 Use the Up and Down buttons to select Enabled or Disabled and press Apply 4 Make another selection or press Exit 5 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 105 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Saving and Restoring the Library Configuration Saving and Restoring the Library Configuration The library has many configurable items such as tape drive IDs partitions user accounts import export I E stations and cleaning slots In the event of a hardware failure or firmware upgrade the save and restore operations can be used to restore the library s configurable items to a previous state The save restore operation also saves and restores library firmware and license keys installed on the library Note The save restore operations should not be performed concurrently by multiple administrators logged in from different locations You can access the screens but you cannot apply changes while another administrator is performing the same operation Saving the Library This operation saves your current library configuration and library Configuration firmware It is recommended that you save the library configuration after modifying a configurable item and before upgrading firmware This allows you to restore the most current settings if necessary Save your library configurati
336. ut Diagnostic Tickets on page 248 The library not ready messages include the following with possible solutions listed Message Resolution Library is not ready The robotic subsystem is not ready for robotic motion Check the diagnostic ticket and follow the resolution steps listed see About Diagnostic Tickets on page 248 Library is becoming ready The library s robotic subsystem is initializing and becoming ready Wait for the library to finish initialization Library is not initialized The library control firmware failed to initialize Try the following e Check the diagnostic ticket and follow the resolution steps listed see About Diagnostic Tickets on page 248 e Power cycle the library to clear the error If that fails contact Quantum Support Library needs manual attention The robotic subsystem encountered an obstruction or hardware error Try the following e Check the diagnostic ticket and follow the resolution steps listed see About Diagnostic Tickets on page 248 e Power cycle the library to clear the error If that fails contact Quantum Support Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 255 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Retrieving Tape Drive Logs Note You may not see the not ready message in the Web client until the browser refreshes Similarly even if the problem has been resolved the not ready message will not disappear from
337. ve slot not the particular tape drive if the tape drive were to be moved to a different slot in the library e You can select only tape drives in partitions to which you have been given access e If you change the mode of a control path tape drive to offline a caution dialog displays asking you to confirm the mode change For information on control path tape drives see Configuring Control Paths on page 66 You can change the tape drive mode from both the operator panel and the Web client Operator Panel 1 Select Actions gt Tape Drive gt Change Mode 2 If more than one tape drive is in the library use the Up and Down buttons to select a tape drive Press Modify 4 Use the Up and Down buttons to select Online or Offline Press Apply The new mode is displayed 6 Press Exit Web Client 1 Select Operations gt Drive gt Change Mode The Change Drive Mode screen displays This screen lists each tape drive s partition location state current mode activity and version Note If more than four tape drives are installed in the library use the Page 1 of x arrows to view the additional tape drives 2 Locate the tape drive that you want to take offline or bring online In the tape drive table under Mode the Current column indicates the current mode of the partition The New column contains an Online Offline button The button toggles between modes Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 173
338. vices gt ICMP 2 Press Modify 3 Use the Up and Down buttons to select Enabled or Disabled and press Apply 4 Make another selection or press Exit 5 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 103 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Configuring Security Settings Remote Access Via Web Enables or disables remote access to the library via the Web client This Client setting is enabled by default meaning remote access is allowed Operator Panel 1 Select Setup gt Security Services gt Web client 2 Press Modify 3 Use the Up and Down buttons to select Enabled or Disabled and press Apply 4 Make another selection or press Exit 5 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Remote Service Login Enables or disables remote service user login from the Web client or over the Ethernet service port The service user will still be able to log in to the library from the operator panel This setting is enabled by default meaning remote service login is allowed Operator Panel 1 Select Setup gt Security Services gt Service User 2 Press Modify 3 Use the Up and Down buttons to select Enabled or Disabled and press Apply 4 Make another selection or press Exit 5 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 SNMP V1 V2 This topic is discus
339. voltage limits outside the specified range exceeded 38 Predictive C A hardware failure of the tape drive is Predictive failure of failure predicted Call the tape drive supplier drive hardware help line 39 Diagnostics W The tape drive may have a hardware The drive may have a required fault Run extended diagnostics to hardware fault that verify and diagnose the problem Check may be identified by the tape drive user s manual for device extended diagnostics specific instructions on running i e SEND extended diagnostic tests DIAGNOSTIC command 40 Obsolete 46 47 Reserved 49 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 291 Appendix B Tape Alert Flag Descriptions Recommended Application Client No Flag Severity Message Probable Cause 50 Lost statistics W Media statistics have been lost at some Drive or library time in the past powered down with tape loaded 51 Tape directory W The tape directory on the tape cartridge Error prevented the invalid at just unloaded has been corrupted File tape directory being unload search performance will be degraded updated on unload The tape directory can be rebuilt by reading all the data 52 Tape system C The tape just unloaded could not write Write errors while area write its system area successfully writing the system failure 1 Copy data to another tape cartridge area on unload 2 Discard the old cartridge 5
340. with the installation and contact Quantum customer support 2 Open the library packing box and remove the kit tray containing the accessory kit and the rail kit see Figure 6 Some configurations come with tape drives installed in the library and some come with tape drives packaged separately If yours comes with tape drives packaged separately remove them and set aside for installation later Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 15 Chapter 2 Unpacking the Library Figure 6 Packaging Accessory kit Rail kit Kit tray Top foam Bottom foam Shipping carton Bottom tray Scalar i80 only Scalar i40 Pallet Scalar i80 only Scalar i80 3 Remove the top foam 4 Scalar i80 only Remove the shipping carton by lifting it straight up out of the bottom tray 5 With the help of a second person lift the library chassis out of the shipping carton and place it on a table approximately waist high 16 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 2 Unpacking the Library WARNING Two people are required to safely lift the library out of its packaging or into a rack Caution Lift the library chassis at the sides Avoid putting the weight of the library chassis on the front bezel 6 Remove the anti static wrapping from the library Keep the anti static wrapping intact so that you can use it later if needed 7 Save the packing box packaging materia
341. wn TLS Certificates on the Library on page 36 If valid TLS certificates are not installed you must install them You can install either of the following e Quantum provided TLS certificates see Installing Quantum Supplied TLS Certificates on the Library on page 191 e Your own TLS certificates see Installing Your Own TLS Certificates on the Library on page 193 KMIP compliant key TLS certificates will be provided by your management KMIP server administrator Install certificates as described in Installing Your Own TLS Certificates on the Library on page 36 Checking for Current From the Tools menu select EKM Management gt Import Certificates Communication Certificates The Tools TLS Communication Certificate Import screen appears Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Figure 34 Tools TLS Communication Certificate Import SKM Installing Quantum Supplied TLS Certificates on the Library Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Installing TLS Certificates on the Library Scalar i80 leate Import nay be aesded by brreseg ie Me Mes and seeing booty rettcate buse may be apesse accicabe k mes cette If TLS certificates are currently installed they will be listed in a table at the bottom of the screen If they are not installed a message appears at the bottom of the screen stating that certificates are not installed Quantum supplied T
342. y I E station slots that appear in the Empty I E Station Slots field The number of cartridges you can export is limited to the number of empty I E station slots You cannot export cartridges if all I E station slots are full Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 159 Chapter 6 Performing Library Operations Performing Media Operations Loading Tape Drives 5 Select one or more cartridges for export Note You can use the Filter by Barcode text box to filter the available cartridge barcodes Click the Help button next to the Find button for more information about filtering barcodes In addition if not all cartridges appear on the screen use the Page 1 of x arrows to view the additional cartridges Note Bold column headings in the table can be sorted For example selecting the Location column heading will sort by location coordinates 6 Click Apply 7 Click OK to confirm it is OK to take the partition offline The robot moves the cartridge to the I E station A success message displays when the export completes 8 Once the operation completes you may open the I E station and remove the cartridges see Unlocking and Opening the I E Station on page 145 The Load Drive operation enables you to load a cartridge from a storage slot into a tape drive The storage slot and tape drive must be assigned to the same partition This topic focuses on using the library user interface not the host
343. y have little or no effect on operations This level of priority is conveying an informational message 248 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 10 Troubleshooting About Diagnostic Tickets The library has a number of visual cues to alert you that one or more diagnostic tickets exist e The library s ticket indicator LED turns on to indicate that at least one ticket exists see Front Panel LEDs on page 257 e The operator panel displays a health status icon see Health status on page 24 for description e The Web client displays a subsystem status icon see Subsystem Status on page 30 You can frequently resolve a simple problem yourself but if the problem is complex or involves a field replaceable unit FRU you will be directed to contact Quantum Support Only qualified service technicians can service FRUs Note During startup the system may generate Tape Alert ticket s indicating a drive is not assigned to a partition Note the drive location on the ticket and review the Library Configuration report to verify the drive partition assignment Viewing Closing and The initial status of all diagnostic tickets is Unopened Once you select Resolving Diagnostic the Resolve button the ticket status changes to Opened When you Tickets close the ticket its status changes to Closed You can view Opened and Unopened tickets on both the operator panel and the Web client but you can view Closed
344. y of the following happens Any navigation button is pressed The Assign I E screen displays see Manual Cartridge Assignment on page 99 Tape drives start to autolevel The library receives a signal to shut down Library health diagnostic ticket status changes Library ready status changes The operator panel will NOT go dark when The library is initializing Tape drives are autoleveling The Assign I E screen is displayed see Manual Cartridge Assignment on page 99 An operator panel initiated operation is in progress such as IVT The Setup Wizard is displayed Passwords are enabled on the operator panel and a user is logged in The power save timeout value is set to NEVER Operator Panel 1 2 3 Select Setup gt System Settings gt Power Save Press Modify Use the Up and Down buttons to select the desired setting and press Apply Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide 101 Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Configuring Security Settings Configuring Security Settings You can enable disable the following security settings on the operator panel Network Interface SSH Services Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP Remote Access Via Web Client Remote Service Login e SNMP V1 V2 SSL Network Interface Enables or disables all external access to the library This setting is enabled by default to allow external access Operator Panel 1 Selec
345. you can apply a license key to the library Caution While you are installing a license key backup operations may be interrupted Operator Panel Note Entering a license key on the operator panel is difficult It is recommended that you use the Web client if possible 1 Select Setup gt License Installation and press Select The Current Licenses screen is displayed 2 Select Add The Enter License Key screen is displayed Five blank digits appear on the screen The first digit is highlighted 3 Use the Up and Down buttons to scroll through the list of letters and numbers until you reach the letter or number you want Press the Right button to advance to the next digit Repeat for the remaining digits 4 When all the digits are entered correctly press Apply 70 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Chapter 4 Configuring the Library Working With E mail Notifications 5 Press OK 6 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Web Client 1 From the Web client select Setup gt License 2 Type the new license key in the Enter New License Key text box 3 Click Apply 4 Refresh your Internet browser Adding a license can sometimes affect menu display Refreshing the browser updates all the menus 5 Save the library configuration see Saving the Library Configuration on page 106 Working With E mail Notifications The library can be configur
346. yption LME for library partitions library_b Click here to run EKM Path Diagnostics titi 5 Wait 3 minutes to allow the changes to complete 6 Go back to the encryption partition configuration screen and change the encryption method back to LME enabled see Figure 39 7 Click Apply Data encryption keys are generated The library triggers the SKM server to generate a set of unique data encryption keys This takes 15 minutes to an hour or longer depending on network performance The library notifies you when the process is complete 202 Quantum Scalar i40 and Scalar i80 User s Guide Figure 39 Changing Encryption Method back to LME enabled Sharing Encrypted Tape Cartridges Chapter 7 Encryption Key Management Performing Scalar Key Manager Functions Available on the Library Setup Encryption Partition Configuration Set up Library Managed Encryption LME for library partitions Partition EKM Type Key Reuse library_a SKM o library_b SKM o Click here to run EKM Path Diagnostics 8 Wait for the process to complete before resuming library operations 9 Back up both SKM server keystores See the Scalar Key Manager User s Guide for instructions on backing up the keystores Caution You must back up the keystores every time you generate new data encryption keys to protect against catastrophic server failure If you are using SKM you can share encrypted tapes with other companies and in

Quantum Scalar i40

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents